Contents

Yamaha Clavinova CVP-900 Piano Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 176
1 of 176

Summary of Content for Yamaha Clavinova CVP-900 Piano Owner's Manual PDF

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation 2002 Yamaha Corporation V954900 ???AP???.?-0?A0 Printed in Indonesia

Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

OWNERS MANUAL

C V

P-900 O

W N

E R

S M A

N U

A L

CVP-900

DIC F283 Vert cyprs

Introduction

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servic- ing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

The lightning ash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral trian- gle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclo- sure that may be of sufcient magni- tude to constitute a risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specically authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor- mance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims led under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modied. Implied warranties may also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specications without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro- duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately ve years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualied service representative to perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid- ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man- ufacturers warranty, and are therefore the owners respon- sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi- cates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-469 1

(bottom)

PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, re or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Only use the voltage specied as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.

Use only the supplied power cord/plug. Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters

or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter- nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualied Yamaha service personnel.

Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liq- uids which might spill into any openings.

Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a re.

If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by quali- ed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a mul- tiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.

Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disgu- ration or damage to the internal components.

Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.

Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. Also check that all screws are tight and have not been loosened by moving the instrument.

Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/ one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air cir- culation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

3CVP-900

(1)B-7 1/2

C

4

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo- nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to mini- mum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

Gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument's n- ish.

When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning uids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ngers, and do not insert a nger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instru- ment.

Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualied Yamaha service personnel.

Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

Bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the nish to crack or peel. Use cau- tion.

Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instru- ment, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.

Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in acci- dent or injury.

Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury.

If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data Current memory data (see page 40) is lost when you turn off the

power to the instrument. Save the data to a oppy disk/the User Drive (see page 40). Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect opera- tion. Save important data to a oppy disk.

Backing up the oppy disk To protect against data loss through media damage, we recom-

mend that you save your important data onto two oppy disks.

Caution for data operations Make sure NEVER to turn the CVP-900s power off during any kind of data operation involving the USER/FLOPPY DISK drives such as saving, deleting, or copying/pasting until the operation is completely nished. (Make sure to wait until the alert message disappears.) Turning the power off during the operation results in the loss of the data being saved or pasted to the respective drive.

Keeping the power on during such operations is particularly important in regard to the USER drive. Turning off the power while performing a save/delete/paste operation with the USER drive may result in loss of ALL data on the USER drive (upon the next power on) and not just the data in question. In other words, if you are performing a save/delete/paste operation on only the song data of the USER drive and you turn off the power before the operation is completed, you risk losing ALL your USER drive data including all voices, styles, and Registration Memory presets youve saved to the USER drive. This caution also applies to creating a new folder on the USER drive or using the factory reset operation (page 151).

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

VP-900

(1)B-7 2/2

5

CVP-900

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced

and convenient functions of the Clavinova. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

About this Owners Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference. Also, a separate Data List is provided.

Introduction (page 2):

Please read this section rst.

Quick Guide (page 20):

This section explains how to use the basic functions.

Basic Operation (page 39):

This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls.

Reference (page 53):

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinovas various functions.

Data List :

Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

* The model CVP-900 will be referred to as the CVP/Clavinova in this Owners Manual. * The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owners manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument. * The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English. * Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

Trademarks: Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

* The photos of the harpsichord, bandoneon, hackbrett, music box, dulcimer and cimbalom, shown in the displays of the CVP- 900, are courtesy of the Gakkigaku Shiryokan (Collection for Organolgy), Kunitachi College of Music.

* The following instruments, shown in the displays of the CVP-900, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments: balafon, gender, kalimba, kanoon, santur, gamelan gong, harp, hand bell, bagpipe, banjo, carillon, mandolin, oud, pan ute, pungi, rabab. shanai, sitar, steel drum, tambra.

* This product is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901 from IVL Technologies Ltd.

* The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

COPYRIGHT NOTICE

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles les, MIDI les, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DONT MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

6

Accessories 50 greats for the Piano Disk (and Music Book)

Recording disk Use this blank disk to save your performance.

Owners Manual This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova.

Data List This manual contains lists of voices, styles and parameters, etc.

Bench A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk Precautions Be sure to handle oppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.

3.5" 2DD and 2HD type oppy disks can be used.

To insert a oppy disk into the disk drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.

To eject a oppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to conrm that data is not being written to the oppy disk. If data is currently being written to the oppy disk in the following operations, the messages Now executing, Now copying, and Now formatting appears in the display. Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data

(page 43 - 45). Naming les and folders (page 42); creating a new

folder (page 45). Copying a disk to an another disk (page 150);

formatting the disk (page 150).

Compatible Disk Type

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks

Drive lamp When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used.

Eject button

CVP-900

Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the data is being written to the oppy disk. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.

If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half- pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the oppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure.

Be sure to remove the oppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A oppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors.

Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors.

To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially- available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.

Never insert anything but oppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or oppy disks.

To handle oppy disks with care: Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep oppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use.

Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids.

Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the oppy disk inside.

Do not expose the disk to magnetic elds, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic elds can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

Never use a oppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.

Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a oppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location.

To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide

the disks write-protect tab to the protect position (tab open).

Data backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that

you keep two copies of important data on separate oppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to Disk function on page 150.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

About the Floppy Disks

write-protect tab open (protect position)

7CVP-900

CVP-900

8

About the Display Messages

A message (information or conrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button.

Maintenance

Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well).

CAUTION

Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber products on the instrument.

Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded.

CAUTION

Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read Precautions on pages 3 - 4.

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you rst took it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When transporting the assembled Clavinova, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument.

The Clavinova-Computer Connection

is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specic models). The document is available as a PDF le (in English) at the following Internet address:

Clavinova Home Page

.......................... http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments)

......... http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

You can select the desired language from the Help dis- play (page 50).

F

J

I

H

G For this example, press the [G] (YES) button to execute formatting.

Table of Contents

Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION ................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS.......................................................... 3 About this Owners Manual and Data List .............. 5 Accessories ............................................................... 6 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)

and Floppy Disk..................................................... 6 About the Display Messages.................................... 8 Maintenance ............................................................ 8 Application Index................................................... 12 What can you do with the Clavinova?................... 14 Setting Up the Clavinova....................................... 16 Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18

Quick Guide ........................... 20 Playing the Demos ................................................. 20 Song Playback ........................................................ 21

Playback of Songs ....................................................21 Playing Voices ........................................................ 25

Playing a Voice ........................................................25 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands .....27

Playing Styles ......................................................... 28 Playing a style ..........................................................28 Style Sections...........................................................30 One Touch Setting...................................................32

Music Finder........................................................... 33 Using the Music Finder ............................................33 Searching the Music Finder Records.........................34

Playing and Practicing with the Songs.................. 36 Playing Along with the Clavinova.............................36 Recording ................................................................37 Mastering Your Favorite Songs.................................38

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data ....... 39 Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 41 File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 42

Naming Files/Folders ...............................................42 Moving Files/Folders ................................................43 Copying Files/Folders...............................................44 Deleting Files/Folders...............................................44 Saving Files ..............................................................45 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............45 Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................45 Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................45

Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 47 Direct Access Instant Selection of Displays....... 48 Help Messages ....................................................... 50 Using the Metronome............................................ 51 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 51

Tap Tempo ..............................................................52

Reference Playing the Demos.................53

Voices.....................................55 Selecting a Voice .................................................... 55

One-touch Piano Play.............................................. 56 Layer/Left Playing Several Sounds

Simultaneously .................................................... 57 Layer Layering Two Different Voices ................... 57 Left Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right

Sections of the Keyboard ..................................... 58 Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 58 Using the Pedals..................................................... 59

Styles......................................60 Playing a style ........................................................ 60

Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 62 Chord Fingerings.................................................... 63 Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS:

MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) ......... 65 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys

(SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 66 Selecting Intro and Ending Types

(INTRO/ENDING) ................................................ 67 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing

accompaniment sections Auto Fill In................ 67 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style

(ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 68 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the

Sections OTS Link............................................ 69 Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting

(ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 69 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music

Music Finder.................................................... 70 Searching the Ideal Setups Music Finder Search.. 71 Editing Records Music Finder Record Edit ........... 72

Song Playback........................74 Compatible Song Types ......................................... 74 Song Playback ........................................................ 75

Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 75 Playing Back Songs on Disk..................................... 77 Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 77

Muting Specific Parts Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks............................ 78

Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 78 Using the Practice Functions Guide ................... 79

Practice Functions ................................................... 79 Practicing Music with the Guide Functions.............. 80

Displaying Music Notation Score ...................... 81 Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 84

9CVP-900

10

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory ........ 85 Registering Panel Setups

Registration Memory...................................... 85 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.................86

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 87

Editing Voices Sound Creator ................... 88 Operation ............................................................... 88 SOUND CREATOR Parameters

(Natural/Regular Voices) .................................... 89 Organ Flutes........................................................... 93 Operation ............................................................... 93

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator ..................... 94 About Song Recording........................................... 94 Quick Recording..................................................... 95 Multi Recording ..................................................... 96 Recording Individual Notes Step Record .......... 98

Operation ................................................................98 Recording Melodies Step Record (Note) ............100 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto

Accompaniment Step Record (Chord) ............101 Select the Recording Options: Starting,

Stopping, Punching In/Out Rec Mode......... 103 Editing a Recorded Song ..................................... 104

Editing Channel-related Parameters Channel .....104 Editing Note Events 1 - 16.................................107 Editing Chord Events CHD.................................108 Editing System Events SYS/EX.

(System Exclusive) ..............................................108 Inputting and Editing Lyrics ...................................109 Customizing the Event List Filter........................109

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator ................... 110 About Creating Accompaniment Styles .............. 110 Style File Format .................................................. 111 Operation ............................................................. 111 Realtime Recording Basic ................................ 112 Step Recording..................................................... 113 Assembling an Accompaniment Style

Assembly ........................................................ 114 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 115

Change the Rhythmic Feel Groove and Dynamics....................................115

Editing the Channel Data.......................................117 Making Style File Format Settings Parameter ......118

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console ................120 Operation ............................................................. 120 Setting the Level Balance and Voice

Volume/Voice ............................................... 121 Changing the Tone of the Voice Filter............ 122 Changing Pitch-related Settings Tune ............ 122 Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 123 Adjusting the Sound to Match the Performance

Environment EQ............................................ 125 Effect Structure ..................................................... 126

Using a Microphone MIC. 128 Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type ......................... 128

Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects OVERALL SETTING.............................. 130

Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone MICROPHONE SETTING .......... 130

Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects TALK SETTING............................................... 132

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function...........................133 Operation ............................................................. 133 Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale

Master Tune/Scale Tune............................... 135 Tuning the Overall Pitch Master Tune............... 135 Selecting a Scale Scale Tune ............................. 135

Setting Song-related Parameters Song Settings................................................ 137

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering......................................... 138

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 138

Setting the Fingering Method Chord Fingering ............................................ 139

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard Controller...................................................... 139

Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 139 Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose Key-

board/Panel ....................................................... 141 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and

Voice Set............................................................ 142 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Mem-

ory Presets Registration Sequence.................. 142 Maintaining Panel Settings Freeze .................... 142 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings

Voice Set............................................................ 143 Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 143

CVP-900

Introduction

Quick Guide

Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data

Playing the Demos

Voices

Styles

Song Playback

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups - Registration Memory

Editing Voices - Sound Creator

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs - Song Creator

Creating Accompaniment Styles - Style Creator

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices - Mixing Console

Making Global and Other Important Settings - Function

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

Using a Microphone - MIC.

Appendix

Showing the Clavinova Display on a TV Video Out...................................................... 144

Setting the MIDI Parameters............................... 145 Making Overall System Settings

(Local Control, Clock, etc.) System.................145 Transmitting MIDI Data Transmit ......................146 Receiving MIDI Data Receive .............................147 Setting Root Note Channels Root ......................147 Setting Chord Channels Chord Detect ..............147

Other Settings Utility ...................................... 148 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,

Parameter Lock, and Tap CONFIG 1...............148 Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System,

and Voice Number Indication CONFIG 2........149 Copying and Formatting Disks Disk...................150 Entering Your Name and Language Preference

Owner............................................................151 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the

CVP-900 System Reset....................................151

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices.............. 152

Using the Headphones (PHONES jacks)..................152 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar

(MIC./LINE IN jack).............................................152 Connecting Audio & Video Devices .......................153 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller

(AUX PEDAL jack) ...............................................154 Connecting external MIDI devices

(MIDI terminals) .................................................154 Connecting to a Computer

(MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................154 Whats MIDI?.........................................................156 What You Can Do With MIDI .................................158

Data Compatibility............................................... 159 Disk format ............................................................159 Sequence Format...................................................159 Voice Allocation Format .........................................160

Keyboard Stand Assembly ................... 161

Troubleshooting.................. 163

Specifications ...................... 166

Index ................................... 168

11CVP-900

12

Application Index

Use this index to nd reference pages that may be helpful for your particular application and situation.

Listening Listening to the internal songs ................................................................................................................ page 75 Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... Playing Back Songs on Disk on page 77 Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 53 Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 55 Listening to songs with the special voices of the Clavinova .................................................................. page 121

Playing Calling up the piano setting ................................................................................................................... page 56 Using the three performance control pedals........................................................................................... page 59 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch.............................................................Transpose on page 141 Combining two voices ...................................................... Layer Layering Two Different Voices on page 57 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands

...........................Left Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard on page 58

Changing the sound Enhancing the sound with reverb and other effects .....................................Applying Voice Effects on page 58

Adjusting the Effects on page 123 Adjusting the Level Balance ................................................................................................................. page 121 Combining two voices ...................................................... Layer Layering Two Different Voices on page 57 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands

...........................Left Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard on page 58 Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 88

Playing the auto accompaniment Playing the accompaniment automatically............................................................................................. page 60 Calling up ideal panel settings for your music ........................................................................................ page 70

Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part .......................................................................................................... page 80 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. Using the Metronome on page 51

Recording Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 95, 96 Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 98

Creating your original settings Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 88 Creating accompaniment styles............................................................................................................ page 110

CVP-900

Using a microphone Connecting the microphone.............. Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack) on page 152 Adding automatic harmonies to your singing ....................................................................................... page 128

Settings Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 85 Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 135 Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 137 Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 138 Making settings for the pedals .......................................................Making Settings for the Pedals on page 139 Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 141 Showing the display on a TV .................... Showing the Clavinova Display on a TV Video Out on page 144 Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 145

Connecting the Clavinova to other devices Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... Whats MIDI? on page 156 Recording your performance................ Playing the sounds of the Clavinova through an external audio system,

and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks) on page 153 Raising the volume .............................. Playing the sounds of the Clavinova through an external audio system,

and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks) on page 153 Outputting another instruments sound from the Clavinova ............ Outputting the sound of an external device

through the built in speakers of the Clavinova (AUX IN jacks) on page 153 Connecting a computer........... .Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals) on page 154

Assembling Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova......................................Keyboard Stand Assembly on page 161

Quick solution Basic functions of the Clavinova and how you can best use it .........................................................pages 12, 14 Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting

........................... Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the CVP-900 System Reset on page 151 Displaying the Messages ......................................................................About the Display Messages on page 8 Adjusting the contrast/brightness.......................................... .Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System,

and Voice Number Indication CONFIG 2 on page 149 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 163

13CVP-900

CVP-900

14

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5

START STOP

SYNC. STARTNEW SONG

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

DIGITAL STUDIO

What can you do with the Clavinova?

SONG

Playback previously recorded songs (page 21, 36, 74)

Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs as well as songs on commercially available disks.

VOCAL HARMONY

Automatic backup singing (page 128)

This sophisticated function automatically adds appropriate vocal harmonies to your singing.

DEMO

Explore the Demos (page 20, 53)

These not only showcase the stunning voices and styles of the instrument, they introduce you to the various functions and features and give you hands-on experience using the Clavinova!

STYLE

Back up your performance with Auto Accompaniment (page 28, 60)

Playing a chord with your left hand automatically plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an accompaniment style such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc. and let the Clavinova be your backing band!

DIGITAL RECORDING

Record your performances (page 94, 110) With the powerful and easy-to- use song recording features, you can record your own keyboard performances, and create your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions which you can then save to the USER drive or a oppy disk for future recall.

GUIDE Learn and practice with the Guide functions (page 38, 79) Play back the preset songs or the appropriate disk software, and let the display and guide lamps show you when and where to play the proper notes. Its never been easier or more fun to learn new music!

15CVP-900

F

J

I

4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

REVERB DSP VARIATION

LCD The large LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy- to-understand control of the Clavinovas operations.

MUSIC FINDER Call up the perfect accompaniment style (page 33, 70) If you know what song you want to play, but you dont know which style or voice would be right for it, let the Music Finder help you. Just select the song title, and the Clavinova automatically calls up the most appropriate style and voice.

TO HOST terminal Make music with a computer quickly and easily (page 154) Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music software. Connections and setup are exceptionally easy, and you can play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument sounds all from a single Clavinova!

PIANO Set up the piano instantly (page 56) You can call up all the optimum piano settings for the Clavinova with just a single button press then play the extraordinarily realistic grand piano voice.

VOICE Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices (page 25, 55) The Clavinova features a wealth of exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices (more than 800) including piano, strings, woodwinds, and more!

PC-1 PC-2 MIDIMac

HOST SELECTTO HOSTAUX PEDAL INOUTTHRU

MIDI

L L+R R L L+R R

VIDEO OUT AUX IN AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED) L R

Organ Flutes Craft your own organ voices (page 93) This special function not only gives you a full set of rich and luscious organ sounds, it also lets you create your own original organ voices, just as on a traditional organ, by increasing and decreasing the ute footages, and adding percussive sounds.

16

Setting Up the Clavinova

To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys.

CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching ngers (yours or others, especially childrens) between the cover and the unit.

CAUTION Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, re or other serious damage to the instrument.

To raise the music rest:

1 Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

2 Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest.

3 Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.

To lower the music rest:

1 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

2 Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest).

3 Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down.

CAUTION Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. Also, when lowering the music rest, let the music rest all the way down before releasing it.

These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place.

To open

To close

One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid. Use one of them to open the lid to the desired angle.

For the longer stay, use the inner recess, and for the shorter stay, use the outer recess to support the lid.

To open the lid:

1 Raise the music rest as described in Music Rest on page 16.

2 Raise and hold the right side of the lid (viewed from the keyboard end of the instrument).

3 Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end of the stay ts into the recess in the lid.

Key cover

CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover.

Music Rest

Sheet Music Braces

Lid

Longer stay Shorter stay

CVP-900

CVP-900

To close the lid:

1 Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid.

2 Hold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay.

3 Carefully lower the lid.

4 Lower the music rest as described in Music Rest on page 16.

CAUTION Make sure that the end of the stay ts securely in the lid recess. If

the stay is not properly seated in the recess, the lid may fall, caus- ing damage or injury.

Be careful that you or others do not bump the stay while the lid is raised. The stay may be bumped out of the lid recess causing the lid to fall.

Be careful to avoid catching ngers (yours or others, especially childrens) when raising or lowering the lid.

Connect the power cord.

1 Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet.

In some areas, a plug adapter may be provided to match the pin conguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

(The shape of plug differs depending on locale.)

2 Press the [POWER] switch. The main display appears in the LCD display. The

drive lamp below the lower right end of the keyboard also lights.

When youre ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch again. Both the display and the drive lamp below the

right end of the keyboard will turn off.

Setting the volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level.

CAUTION Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged.

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.)

1 3

2

1

3

24

Turning the Power On and Off

The drive lamp lights.

BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

PART

A

E

D

C

B

BACK

POWER

ON OFF

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

FADE IN / OUT

Using headphones

MIN MAX

INPUT MIC. MIC. LINE PHONESVOLUME LINE IN

17

18

Panel Controls and Terminals

POWER [ON / OFF] button (POWER)................................................ P. 17

METRONOME [START / STOP] button (METRONOME) ............................. P. 51

MASTER VOLUME [MASTER VOLUME] dial...................................................... P. 17 [FADE IN / OUT] button........................................................ P. 66

MIC. [VOCAL HARMONY] button............................................... P. 128 [TALK] button...................................................................... P. 128 [EFFECT] button ................................................................ P. 128 [VH TYPE SELECT] button................................................ P. 128 [MIC. SETTING] button ...................................................... P. 128

SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ...................................... P. 78 [TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................ P. 78 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ........................................................... P. 78 [REC] button ........................................................................ P. 94 [TOP] button......................................................................... P. 77 [START / STOP] button (SONG) .......................................... P. 75 [REW] button........................................................................ P. 77 [FF] button............................................................................ P. 77 [REPEAT] button .................................................................. P. 78 [GUIDE] button..................................................................... P. 79

TEMPO [E] [F] buttons (TEMPO)............................................... P. 51 [TAP TEMPO] button............................................................ P. 52

TRANSPOSE [E] [F] buttons (TRANSPOSE) ................................... P. 141

STYLE [ACMP] button...................................................................... P. 61 [AUTO FILLIN] button........................................................... P. 67 [OTS LINK] button................................................................ P. 69 [BREAK] button.................................................................... P. 65

[INTRO] button ............................................................... P. 31, 67 MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 65 MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 65 MAIN [C] button ................................................................... P. 65 MAIN [D] button ................................................................... P. 65 [ENDING / rit.] button ..................................................... P. 31, 67 [SYNC.STOP] button............................................................ P. 66 [SYNC.START] button.......................................................... P. 61 [START / STOP] button (STYLE) ......................................... P. 61

MENU [DEMO] button ..................................................................... P. 53 [HELP] button....................................................................... P. 50 [FUNCTION] button ........................................................... P. 133

DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] button ................................................. P. 88 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button ................................... P. 94, 110 [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 120

DISPLAY CONTROL [A] - [J] buttons..................................................................... P. 41 [BALANCE] button ............................................................... P. 62 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ........................................ P. 62, 77 [DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................... P. 48 [BACK] button ................................................................ P. 41, 47 [NEXT] button ................................................................ P. 41, 47 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button.............................. P. 57 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button................................. P. 57 [1] - [8] buttons .................................................P. 39 - 46 [ENTER] button.................................................................... P. 47 [DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 47 [EXIT] button ........................................................................ P. 41

VOICE EFFECT [REVERB] button ................................................................. P. 58 [DSP] button......................................................................... P. 58 [VARIATION] button ............................................................. P. 58 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ................................................ P. 59 [MONO] button..................................................................... P. 59 [LEFT HOLD] button ............................................................ P. 59

PC-1 PC-2 MIDIMac

HOST SELECTTO HOSTAUX PEDAL INOUTTHRU

MIDI

L L+R R L L+R R

VIDEO OUT AUX IN AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED) L R

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

DIGITAL STUDIO

MIN MAX

INPUT MIC. MIC. LINE PHONESVOLUME LINE IN

SYNC. STARTNEW SONG

1 2

3 4

5 76

13 14

8 9

15 16 17

10 11 12

18 19

20 21 22

23 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

36 37 38

39

40 41

42

43

44

45 50

24

73747576

77 78 79 80

69 70 7271

1

2

3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21

22

23 24 25 26

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

36 37 38

39 40 41

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53

54 55 56 57 58 59

CVP-900

VOICE VOICE buttons ..................................................................... P. 55

MUSIC FINDER [MUSIC FINDER] button ...................................................... P. 70

ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons (ONE TOUCH SETTING)............................ P. 68

PIANO Setting [PIANO] button..................................................................... P. 56

REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] button.................................................................. P. 87 [1] [8] buttons (REGISTRATION MEMORY) ..................... P. 85 [MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 85

Floppy disk drive (3.5)........................................................... P. 6 Keyboard guide lamps ......................................................... P. 79

Microphone and Headphone Connectors [INPUT VOLUME] knob...................................................... P. 152 [MIC. LINE IN] jack............................................................. P. 152 [MIC. LINE] switch.............................................................. P. 152 [PHONES] jacks................................................................. P. 152

Connectors MIDI [THRU] [OUT] [IN] terminals...................................... P. 154 [HOST SELECT] switch ..................................................... P. 154 [TO HOST] terminal ........................................................... P. 155 [AUX PEDAL] jack.............................................................. P. 154 [VIDEO OUT] jack.............................................................. P. 153 AUX IN [L / L+R] [R] jacks.................................................. P. 153 AUX OUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks.............................................. P. 153 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks ............................. P. 153

Pedals Left pedal ............................................................................. P. 59 Sostenuto pedal ................................................................... P. 59 Damper pedal ...................................................................... P. 59

The Panel Logos The logos printed on the Clavinova panel indicate standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.

GM System Level 1 GM System Level 1 is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer.

XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specication which signicantly expands and improves on the GM System Level 1 standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the Clavinovas XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible song les.

XF Format The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The Clavinova is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF le containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence les. The Clavinova is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records song data using SMF Format 0.)

Vocal Harmony Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal processing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Harmony can even change the character and gender of the lead voice as well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal harmony effects.

Disk Orchestra Collection The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices.

Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamahas original style le format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. The Clavinova uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator feature.

F

J

I

4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

REVERB DSP VARIATION

53

46

42

48

68

67

51

52

54

60

61 62

63 64 65 66

55 56 58 5957

49

47

81 82 83

50

60

61

62

63

64 65 66

67 68

69 70 71 72

73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

81 82 83

19CVP-900

20

Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing the Demos

The Clavinova features an extensive variety of Demo songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its dynamic rhythms and styles.

Whats more, theres a special selection of Demo functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of all the important features and functions of the instrument letting you see rsthand how to effectively use the Clavinova in your own music.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when youve nished playing the demo songs.

When youre done with the Demos, you can get to know your Clavinova even better with these functions: Preset Song (Song Book) playback (page 21) Disk Song Playback (page 21) Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26).

Reference on page 53

Demo button

MENU

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

2 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo categories.

BACK NEXT

Voice Demos showcase the voices of the CVP-900. Style Demos introduce you to the rhythms and accompani- ment styles of the CVP-900 (page 53).

For this example, FUNCTION is selected. Function Demos demonstrate many of the different functions on the CVP-900.

1 Pressing the [DEMO] button automatically plays back the Demo songs at random.

3 Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs. For this example, press the [8] (AUTO) button. All of the function demos are played back in sequence.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

VOICE PART ON OFF

H

G LAYER

LEFT

For details about the Demos, refer to page 53.

Quick Guide

Song Playback

Song Playback Heres where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of the Clavinova come together in songs!

As you heard in the Demos, the Clavinova contains many built-in recordings. But theres more. Call up the Song Open (PRESET) display. And theres an even greater wealth of song material you can enjoy with your Clavinova in commercially available software.

The following songs are compatible for playback on the CVP-900. Refer to pages 74, 159 for more details on the logos.

Playback of Songs

1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive.

Reference on page 74

Song related buttons

Floppy disk driveBALANCE and CHANNEL buttons

Make sure that the Lan- guage setting for the instru- ment (page 151) is the same as that of the le name of the song that you are playing back.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices dened in the GM standard.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices dened in Yamahas DOC format.

Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song.

Make sure to read the section Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks on page 6.

CAUTION

Quick Guide 21

Song Playback

22

2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

3 Press the [A] button to select the preset songs (Song Book) folder.

A

E

D

C

B

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.

PRESET FLOPPY DISK

From the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on), you can select songs, voices, accom- paniment styles, etc.

A

E

D

C

B

Quick Guide

Song Playback

4 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select a song le.

5 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

6 While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the y! 1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button. 2) Press the [1 - 8] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off.

REC TOP START / STOP

NEW SONG SYNC.START

To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button. With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyr-

ics on the display during playback. You can also view the score. See pages 81 and 84 for details.

PART

CHANNEL ON / OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

If the STYLE tab is selected, press this button again.

Quick Guide 23

Song Playback

24

7 Finally, take the producers seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels of the individual parts the song, the style, your singing, and your playing. 1) Press the [BALANCE] button. 2) Press the [1 - 8] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

BALANCE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

You can call up a full set of mixing controls by pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button (page 120).

REC TOP START / STOP

NEW SONG SYNC.START

The [FADE IN/OUT] but- ton (page 66) can be used to produce smooth fade- ins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the song, as well as the accompaniment.

Quick Guide

Playing Voices

Playing Voices The Clavinova features a stunning variety of over 800 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, youll learn how to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands.

Playing a Voice

1 Press the [F] button to call up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

2 Select a voice group.

Reference on page 55

Voice related buttons

F

J

I

VOICE PART ON OFF

H

G LAYER

LEFT

The voice youre selecting here belongs to the MAIN part, and is called the MAIN voice. (See page 57 for more information.)

Youll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off.

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

VOICE

For this example, STRINGS is selected.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the voice. For this example, PRESET is selected.

Quick Guide 25

Playing Voices

26

3 Select a voice.

4 Play the voices. Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also have the Clavinova demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8] button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn the LAYER part on.

2 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part.

3 Select a voice group. Here, well select a lush pad to ll out the sound. Call up the CHOIR & PAD group.

4 Select a voice. For example, select Hah Choir.

5 Play the voices. Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich sounding layer the MAIN voice you selected in the previous section, plus the new LAYER voice youve selected here.

And thats just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features: Instant setup of the Clavinova for piano play with the press of a single button (page 56). Create your own original voices quickly and easily by changing the settings of existing voices (page 88). Set up your favorite panel settings including voices, styles, and more and call them up whenever you need

them (page 85).

A

E

D

C

B

For this example, Orchestra is selected.

Press the corresponding buttons to select the other pages and discover even more voices.

Press the [8] button to start the Demo for the selected voice. To stop the Demo, press this button again. Theres more to the Demo features than just voices, thoughfor more information, see page 53.

You can instantly jump back to the Main display by dou- ble-clicking on one of the [A] - [J] buttons.

VOICE PART ON OFF

H

G LAYER

LEFT

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

VOICE

Quick Guide

Playing Voices

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT part on.

2 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part.

3 Select a voice group. Here, well select the STRINGS group so that you can play rich, orchestral chords with your left hand.

4 Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. For example, select Symphon. Str.

5 Press the [I] button to call up the SPLIT POINT display. From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that separates the two voices called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 138.)

6 Play the voices. The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or voices).

MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand.

7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

VOICE PART ON OFF

H

G LAYER

LEFT

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

VOICE

F

J

I

H

G

F

J

I

H

G

Split Point

LEFT MAIN/LAYER

EXIT

Quick Guide 27

Playing Styles

28

Playing Styles The Clavinova has a huge variety of musical styles that you can call upon to back up your own performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion accompaniment to a full band or orchestra.

Playing a style

1 Press the [D] button to call up the style group. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

2 Select a style group and a style.

Reference on page 60

Style related buttons

A

E

D

C

B

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the style. For this example, PRESET is selected.

A

E

D

C

B

A

E

D

C

B

For this example, EuroTrance is selected.

For this example, Dance is selected.

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

3 Turn ACMP on. The specied left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the Auto Accompaniment section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style.

4 Turn SYNC.START on.

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

6 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary. Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display.

7 Try playing other chords with your left hand. For information on how to enter chords, see Chord Fingerings on page 63.

8 Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style.

And theres much more. Check out these other style-related features: Easily create your own original styles (page 110). Set up your favorite panel settings including styles, voices, and more and call them up whenever you need

them (page 85).

ACMP

Auto Accompaniment section

Split Point The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment section and the right-hand sec- tion of the keyboard is called the split point. Refer to page 138 for instructions on setting the split point.

SYNC.START

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

The Tempo can also be adjusted by using the [TAP TEMPO] button (page 52).

Quick Guide 29

Playing Styles

30

Style Sections Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of sections. Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats while youre playing. Intros, Endings, Main patterns, and Breaks theyre all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professional- sounding arrangements.

1 - 4 Use the same operations as in Playing a style on pages 28 and 29.

5 Press the [INTRO] button.

6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

When the playback of the intro is nished, it automatically leads into main section.

7 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK] button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure on the next page.)

Embellish and enhance your melodies with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects

This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your right hand based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too.

1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on.

2 Turn ACMP on (page 28).

3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard. The CVP-900 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 143). The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice.

Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 58).

INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro nishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section.

MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats indenitely until another sections button is pressed.

BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional.

ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is nished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically.

VOICE EFFECT

REVERB DSP VARIATION HARMONY / ECHO MONO LEFT HOLD

For details about Harmony/ Echo types, refer to the sep- arate Data List.

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit.

A B C D

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit.

A B C D or

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

8 Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a ll-in, if necessary. Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections.

9 Press the [ENDING] button. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is nished, the style automatically stops.

Accompaniment Structure

AUTO FILLIN

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit.

A B C D

INTRO (page xx)

MAIN VARIATION

Press the [ENDING] button.

INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C

ENDING (page xx) ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C

INTRO D

ENDING D

You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [ENDING] button again while the ending is playing back.

MAIN VARIATION

A

MAIN VARIATION

C

MAIN VARIATION

B

MAIN VARIATION

D

via BREAK

via BREAK

via BREAK

via BREAK

(max. four patterns)

(max. four patterns)

e 67)

ENDING (page 67)

An Intro doesnt necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by simply pressing the INTRO] button at the desired point.

Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the nal eighth note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in.

Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want. If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing. If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section.

Quick Guide 31

Playing Styles

32

One Touch Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button. This is a wonderful way to instantly recongure all the settings on the Clavinova to match the style you want to play.

1 Select a style (page 28).

2 Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons. Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (voices, effects, etc.) that match the current style (see page 68) it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC. START, so that you can immediately start playing the style.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts.

4 Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords with your left hand.

5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups. For details, refer to page 69.

Heres another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance: Use the convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main section (page 69).

Other Controls

FADE IN/OUT The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 66)when starting and stopping the style.

TAP TEMPO The style can be started at any tempo you desire by tapping out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details, see page 52.

SYNC.STOP When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance. For details, see page 66.

FADE IN / OUT

TAP TEMPO

SYNC.STOP

ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4

Quick Guide

Music Finder

Music Finder

If you want to play in a certain song but dont know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder can help you out. Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the CVP-900 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!

Using the Music Finder

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.

2 Select a record.

For this example, press the [1 - 3] button to select a record by song title.

3 Play along with the style playback.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Reference on page 70

MUSIC FINDER button

MUSIC FINDER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select the desired record.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the desired page of records. For this example, ALL is selected.

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

You can also have the voice and other important settings change automatically with the style changes. To do this, turn on OTS LINK (page 69) and set the OTS LINK TIMING (page 138) to REAL TIME.

Quick Guide 33

Music Finder

34

Searching the Music Finder Records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria.

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.

2 Press the [I] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display.

MUSIC FINDER

The results of Search 1 and 2 appear in the correspond- ingly numbered SEARCH 1/ 2 displays.

F

J

I

H

G

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

6 Press the [8] (START SEARCH) button. The search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words.

3 Press the [F], [G] and [H] to clear the previous conditions, if necessary.

4 For this example, press the [A] button to call up the display for inputting the song title.

Refer to page 46 for instruc- tions on entering characters.

5 Enter the song title, then press the [8] (OK) button.

For this example, ANY is selected.

For this example, ALL is selected.

Quick Guide

Music Finder

7 Select a record (see step #2 on page 33) and play along with the style playback.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to oppy disk (pages 39 and 45). In this way, you can expand your Music Finder collection by exchanging them with other Clavinova users.

In the example above, you specied a song title, but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music genre for example, Latin, 8-beat, etc. (page 71).

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data To save your Music Finder data, call up the MUSIC FINDER Open/Save window from the SYSTEM RESET page (page 151) of the UTILITY display, and follow the same procedure as that in the Open/Save window for Voice (page 39, 45). To recall the saved data, execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDERs Open/Save window. Records can be replaced or added (page 72).

In the instructions above, all Music Finder data is handled together. Besides this, when you save or load style les, the Music Finder data that uses the relevant style le(s) is stored or added automatically. When you copy or move a style le on a oppy disk to the USER drive (page 43, 44), the record which was recorded when storing the relevant style is automatically added to the CVP-900.

Music Finder data is compat- ible for both the CVP-900 and the CVP-900.

Quick Guide 35

Playing and Practicing with the Songs

36

Playing and Practicing with the Songs

Playing Along with the Clavinova

In this section, try using the Clavinovas song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you play the part yourself. Its like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform. If you haven't yet mastered the melody part, take a look at the section Mastering Your Favorite Songs on page 38, and practice it a while.

1 - 4 Use the same operations as in Song Playback on pages 21 - 23.

5 Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part.

6 If you want to have the notation displayed as you play, press the [C] button. If you want to see the lyrics, press the [B] button. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

Reference on page 74

Song related buttons

TRACK 1 (R) To cancel the left hand part,

press the [TRACK 2] button.

A

E

D

C

B

If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed.

If you want to start the song right away without an intro, use the Sync Start function. To set Sync Start to standby, simultaneously hold down the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Song playback starts automatically the moment you start playing the mel- ody.

If you can hear the Clavinova playing the melody part as well, check the channel setting for the melody part in the song data, and change the chan- nel assigned to Track 1 (page 137). You can also change the song chan- nel itself permanently (page 105).

REC TOP START / STOP

NEW SONG SYNC.START

REC TOP START / STOP

NEW SONG SYNC.START

Quick Guide

Playing and Practicing with the Songs

Recording The Clavinova lets you record, too quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your keyboard performance.

1 - 3 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in Playing a Voice on pages 25, 26.

4 Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select New Song for recording.

5 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button.

6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard.

7 When youve nished recording, press the [REC] button.

8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

9 Save the recorded data as required (pages 39, 45).

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT

NEW SONG SYNC.START

REC SONG

EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)

TRACK 2 (L)

TRACK 1 (R)

REC

The recorded data will be lost if you turn off the power. To keep your important recordings, youll need to save them to the User drive or oppy disk.

CAUTION

REC TOP START / STOP

NEW SONG SYNC.START

Quick Guide 37

Playing and Practicing with the Songs

38

Mastering Your Favorite Songs The Clavinova has several very useful practice features that help learn and master recorded songs. Here, youll try out the Follow Lights function, and use the special guide lamps to help you play the right notes.

1 - 6 Use the same operations as in Playing Along with the Clavinova on page 36. For this example, you practice the right hand part of Playing Along with the Clavinova.

7 Press the [GUIDE] button.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and practice the missing (muted) part, according to the key guide lamps. If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons.

9 You can use the powerful Repeat function to practice and master difcult parts. Simply specify a short phrase you want to work on and repeat it until youve got it down. 1) While the song is playing back, press the [GUIDE] button once to turn the GUIDE function off. 2) Just before the desired phrase comes around, press the [REPEAT] button to designate the beginning point

for Repeat. 3) Just after the phrase nishes, press the [REPEAT] button again to designate the end point. 4) Turn the GUIDE function on again.

10 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

Before Practicing Before starting a practice session, play back the entire song (without canceling any parts) and listen to it care- fully. This will give you a clear idea of how the song should be played, and will make your practice sessions progress more smoothly. If you want to hear only the melody part, turn the [TRACK 2] and [EXTRA TRACKS] buttons off.

GUIDE

TEMPO

RESET

REC TOP START / STOP

NEW SONG SYNC.START

See pages 79 and 137 for more information on the Guide function.

REC TOP START / STOP

NEW SONG SYNC.START

Quick Guide

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data The CVP-900 utilizes a variety of data types including voices, accompaniment styles, songs and registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the CVP-900; you can also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument. All this data is stored in separate les just as is done on a computer. Here, well show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the CVP-900 in les and folders. Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these displays according to their respective le types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data efciently by putting various les of the same type into a single folder. The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

H

G

The following Open/Save display types are also available; however, these are selected from displays other than the MAIN display (page 151). SYSTEM SETUP MIDI SETUP USER EFFECT MUSIC FINDER MAIN PICTURE LYRICS BACKGROUND PICTURE (page 84)

Open/Save display for Song (page 75)

handles the Song les.

Open/Save display for Voice (page 55)

handles the Voice les.

Open/Save display for Style (page 60)

handles the Style les.

Open/Save display for Registration Bank (page 86)

handles the Registration Bank les.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

39CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

40

Example Open/Save display for Voice Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages.

BACK NEXT

PRESET drive The les that are pre- programmed and installed internally to the CVP-900 are kept here. Preset les can be loaded but cannot be re-written. However, you can use a preset le as a basis for creating your own original le (which can be saved in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive).

USER drive Files kept here are those containing your own original data, created or edited using the various functions of the CVP- 900. They are stored internally to the CVP-900.

FLOPPY DISK drive You can also store your original data to oppy disk. Commercially available disk software can also be called up here. Naturally, these les are available only when the appropriate disk is inserted in the oppy disk drive.

File All data, both pre- programmed and your own original, are stored as les.

Current Memory Current Memory is the area where the voice is called up when you select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved as a le in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive. Recording songs (page 94) and creating accompaniment styles (page 110) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a le or les. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving.

Calls up the upper level directory page. In this example, the voice folder selection page can be called up.

Changes drives among PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK.

CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

Select a le shown in the display. In this example, well select a voice le.

First, press the VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI] button to call up the display containing the les. This display (Open/Save display) is typical of those used to call up and store les (voice les). The CVP-900 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section.

Selecting Files and Folders

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART ON OFF

H

G LAYER

LEFT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

END

1 Select PRESET, USER, or FLOPPY DISK by using the [BACK][NEXT] button.

2 Use the [1] ~ [7] buttons to turn the pages. When the amount of pages exceeds six, the bottom of the display changes as shown below.

Press NextPress Prev.(previous)

3 Select the le/folder. There are two ways to select the le/ folder:

Press the [A] - [J] button. Press the letter button corresponding to the le/folder you wish to call up. (In the example display shown above, the voice les are shown.)

Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button. When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the highlight moves among the available les/folders. Highlight the desired le or folder (voice les are shown in the example above) and press the [ENTER] button to call up the selected item.

Double-clicking the appropriate [A] -[J] button calls up the corresponding le and returns to the MAIN display.

Highlighting the desired le and double-clicking the [ENTER] button calls up the corresponding le and returns to the MAIN display.

Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the MAIN display. You can go back to the previous display by pressing the [EXIT] button.

Selecting a different lan- guage here may cause the following problems. Some characters of the

le names you entered may be garbled.

Files may not be accessi- ble.

Restoring the original lan- guage solves the above problems. Reading the les on the computer with a different language system may cause similar problems to those above.

Exiting from small pop-up windows You can also exit from small pop-up windows (such as in the illustration below) by pressing the [EXIT] button.

41CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

42

Naming Files/Folders You can assign names to les and folders. Any le/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset les/folders you wish to rename, copy them beforehand (page 44) and use them as User les/folders.

File/Folder-related Operations

END

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

1 Press the [1] (NAME) button (page 39). The NAME display appears.

2 Select the appropriate le/folder and press the [7](OK) button. The currently selected le/folder is highlighted. To select another le/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons.

A le/folder name can con- tain up to 50 half size letters (or 25 Hiragana and kanji let- ters), including the Icon ID (see the note below) and the extension.

The le name will appear on your computer as follows. If you change the Icon ID or the extension, the icon may change or the le may not be properly recognized.

ABCDE.S002.MID File ID Icon ID

Extension

Input the new name (page 46).

Press the [8] (OK) button. To cancel, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.

CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

Moving Files/Folders You can move les and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any le/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below.

END

1 Press the [2] (CUT) button (page 39). The CUT display appears.

2 Select the desired le/folder for moving. Select the appropriate le/folder and press the [7](OK) button. The currently selected le/folder is highlighted. To select another le/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several les/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected le/folder again. Press the [6] (ALL) button to select all the les/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6] (ALL) button is pressed the [6] button changes to ALL OFF button to release or cancel the selection.

3 Press the [7] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.

This operation cannot be used to directly move a le/ folder from one oppy disk to another. If you want to do this, cut and paste the le or folder from the rst oppy disk to the USER page, then change disks and paste it to the FLOPPY DISK page.

All les/folders in a oppy disk can be copied to another disk in one batch (page 150).

4 Call up the destination display. Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.

Press the [4] (PASTE) button. The le/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination.

After being pasted, the les are automatically re-ordered in alphabetical order and displayed.

About les/folders in a oppy disk In the FLOPPY DISK page of the Open/Save display, only the les which can be handled in that Open/Save display will appear even though a folder in a oppy disk can contain different kinds of les. In the case of a folder cut- and-paste operation (for oppy disk), an entire folder can be cut; however, only the specic les which can be handled in the current Open/ Save display will be pasted.

43CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

44

Copying Files/Folders You can also copy les and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any le/folder in the PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below.

Deleting Files/Folders You can also delete les and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any le/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be deleted, using the operation described below.

END

1 Press the [3] (COPY) button (page 39). The COPY display appears.

2 Select the desired le/folder. Select the appropriate le/folder and press the [7](OK) button. The currently selected le/folder is highlighted. To select another le/ folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several les/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected le/folder again. Press the [6] (ALL) button to select all the les/folders in the displayed page (PRESET/USER/ FLOPPY DISK). When the [6] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6] button changes to ALL OFF, letting you release or cancel the selection.

3 Press the [7] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.

This operation cannot be used to directly copy a le/ folder from one oppy disk to another. If you want to do this, copy and paste the le or folder from the rst oppy disk to the User page, then change disks and paste it to the Floppy Disk page.

4 Call up the destination display. Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.

Press the [4] (PASTE) button. The le/folder you copied is now pasted at the destination.

Please note that the copy functions are intended for your personal use only.

END 1 Press the [5] (DELETE) button (page 39).

The DELETE display appears.

2 Select the desired le/folder. Select the appropriate le/folder and press the [7](OK)

button. The currently selected le/folder is highlighted. To select another le/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several les/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected le/folder again. Press the [6] (ALL) button to select all the les/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6] button changes to ALL OFF, letting you release or cancel the selection.

Press the [7] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.

The message Are you sure you want to delete the ****** le (or data/folder)? YES/NO appears. YES ..........Deletes the highlighted item. NO ............Exits from the prompt without deleting.

When several les have been selected, the message Are you sure you want to delete the ****** le (or data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL appears. YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or

skips the highlighted item without deleting (NO).

YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once. CANCEL .... Exits from the prompt without deleting.

CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

Saving Files This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current memory (page 40) to les. The les can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK drives. If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, rst return to the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Then, press the appropriate button [A][J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 39, 40).

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder This operation lets you easily organize your various les into categories by creating a new folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections.

Displaying Upper Level pages Press the [8] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from the le level pages.

Entering Characters and Changing Icons

The internal memory capac- ity of the Clavinova is about 3.3MB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD oppy disks is about 720KB and 1.44MB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all le types of the Clavinova (Voice, Style, Song, Regis- tration, etc.) are stored together.

The les of commercially available DOC software and Yamaha Disklavier software, and their edited les on the CVP-900, can be stored in the USER page, but cannot be copied to another oppy disk.

Folder directories can con- tain up to four levels. The maximum total number of les and folders which can be stored is 3,200, but this may differ depending on the length of the le names. The maximum number of les which can be stored in a folder will be 250.

Enter a name for the new le (page 46).

Press the [8] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.

1 Press the [6] (SAVE) button.

Enter the name of the new folder (page 46).

Press the [8](OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.

1 Call up the page to which you wish to create a new folder and press the [7] (NEW) button (page 39).

If you select Japanese as the Language in the FUNCTION display (page 151), the following different types of characters and sizes can be entered:

(kana-kan) Hiragana and kanji, marks (full size)

(kana) Katakana (normal size), marks (full size)

(kana) Katakana (half size), marks (half size) A B C Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size) ABC Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

If youve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display (page 151), the following types of characters are available: CASE Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) case Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

Change the type of character by using the [1] button.

Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the [1] button. This lets you change the icon at the left of the le name.

1 Press the [1] (NAME), [6] (SAVE), or [7] (NEW) button (page 39).

45CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

46

Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your les and folders. The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone.

1 Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

2 Press the appropriate button, [2] - [7] and [2]- [6], corresponding to the character you wish to enter. Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button. If youve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the [7] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the [7] (DELETE) button for a while, or press the [8] (CANCEL) button. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is deleted.

3 To actually enter the new name, press the [8] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.

Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) This applies only if you are using the (kana-kan) button (in Japanese). When the input hiragana characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the [ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate kanji. The reversed area can be changed by the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The converted area can be changed back to hiragana by the [7] (DELETE) button. The reversed area can be cleared at once by the [8] (CANCEL) button. To actually enter the change, press the [8] (OK) button or enter the next character. To enter the hiragana itself (without converting it), press the [8] (OK) button.

Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese and ) Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6] button (before actual entry of the character.)

Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6] button, after actually entering a character by moving the cursor.

Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [8] (OK) or [ENTER] button.

Entering numbers First, select one of the following: A B C (full-size alphabet), ABC CASE (half-size capital alphabet) and case (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold down the appropriate button, [2] - [7] and [2] - [5], for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected.

The following half-size marks cannot be used in naming les and folders: \ / : * ? < > |

In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks (with the exception of kana- kan and half-size katakana), you can call up the mark list by pressing the [6] button after selecting a character (before actual entry of a character).

CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

Changing the Icon You can also change the icon that appears at the left of the le name. Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the [1] (ICON) button from the character input display (page 46).

Select the desired icon by using the [A] - [J] buttons, or by using the [3] - [5] buttons, then enter the selected icon by pressing the [8] (OK) button.

This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display.

Adjusting values You can change parameter values by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the example [BALANCE] display, turning the dial adjusts the volume of the part in reverse display (highlight). To adjust the volume of another part, rst select the part by pressing the [] button corresponding to the part, then rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Selecting items You can select the desired item or function in the display by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item can then be called up or executed by using the [ENTER] button. In the example VOICE display, you can select the desired voice le with the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up the selected item by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BACK NEXT

H

G

Cancels the icon selection operation.

Turns pages for icon selection.

Enters the selected icon.

Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

47CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

48

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display with just a single additional button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 139).

Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 49) for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function.

Direct Access Instant Selection of Displays

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

DIRECT ACCESS

ACMP

DIRECT ACCESS

Heres a convenient way to return to the MAIN display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button.

CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

Direct Access Chart Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below Corresponding LCD display and function See pages

STYLE [ACMP] FUNCTION CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection 139

[BREAK]

MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART)

VOLUME/VOICE

VOICE settings

121[INTRO] PANPOT settings

MAIN [A] VOLUME settings

MAIN [B] FILTER

HARMONIC CONTENT settings 122

MAIN [C] BRIGHTNESS settings

MAIN [D]

EFFECT

REVERB settings

123[ENDING] CHORUS settings

[AUTO FILL IN] DSP settings

[OTS LINK] FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT 138

[SYNC. STOP] SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting

[SYNC. START]

[START/STOP]

SONG [TRACK1]

FUNCTION SONG SETTING

TRACK1 CHANNEL selection

137

[TRACK2] TRACK2 CHANNEL selection

[EXTRA TRACKS]

[REPEAT]

[GUIDE] GUIDE MODE selection

[REC]

[TOP]

[START/STOP]

[REW]

[FF]

METRONOME [START/STOP]

FUNCTION

UTILITY

METRONOME settings

148[FADE IN/OUT] FADE IN/OUT settings

TEMPO [TAP TEMPO] TAP settings

[ ] MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 146

[ ]

TRANSPOSE [ ] CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE assignment 141

[ ] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE TRANSPOSE settings 122

MENU [DEMO]

FUNCTION

UTILITY LANGUAGE selection 151

[HELP] LCD BRIGHTNESS settings 149

[FUNCTION] MIDI MIDI settings 145

DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE

MASTER TUNING setting 135

[DIGITAL RECORDING] SCALE TUNING setting

[MIXING CONSOLE] MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings 125

[BALANCE] MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) VOLUME/VOICE

VOLUME settings 121

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] VOICE settings

[DIRECT ACCESS] Exit from the Direct Access mode [NEXT]

[BACK]

[ENTER]

[EXIT] Return to the MAIN display VOICE PART [LAYER]

MIXING CONSOLE

TUNE OCTAVE settings 122 [LEFT]

VOICE EFFECT [REVERB]

EFFECT

REVERB settings

123[DSP] DSP settings

[VARIATION] EFFECT TYPE selection

[HARMONY/ECHO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO 143

[MONO] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME settings 122

[LEFT HOLD]

FUNCTION

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting 138

VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI]

VOICE SET 143

[E.PIANO]

[ORGAN & ACCORDION]

[PERCUSSION]

[GUITAR]

[BASS]

[BRASS]

[WOODWIND]

[STRINGS]

[CHOIR & PAD]

[SYNTH.]

[XG]

[USER]

ORGAN FLUTES MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings 125

[MUSIC FINDER] MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 (Searching the records) 71

ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

MIC. [VOCAL HARMONY] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT MIC. REVERB setting 123

[TALK] MIC. SETTING TALK SETTING 132

[EFFECT] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT MIC. DSP setting 123

[VH TYPE SELECT] VOCAL HARMONY VOCAL HARMONY EDIT (Editing the VOCAL HARMONY parameters) 128

[MIC. SETTING] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT MIC. EFFECT TYPE selection 123

[PIANO] FUNCTION

CONTROLLER KEYBOARD TOUCH selection 141

REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] FREEZE 142

[1]

REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the REGISTRATION) 86

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[MEMORY]

FUNCTION

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) 142

PEDAL RIGHT

CONTROLLER

RIGHT PEDAL function assignment

139 CENTER CENTER PEDAL function assignment

LEFT LEFT PEDAL function assignment

AUX AUX PEDAL function assignment

EE

EE

49CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

50

The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the CVP-900.

Help Messages

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

HELP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BACK NEXT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

EXIT

MENU

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

2-1 Select the desired Help topic. 2-2 Call up the topic.

Select the Language, if necessary. The language selected here are also used for various Messages shown during operations.

Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages:

ENGLISH JAPANESE GERMAN FRENCH SPANISH ITALIAN

Use this to select different pages.

Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word (using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic.

3

Press this to return to the previous display.

END

1

The language can also be selected in the FUNCTION LANGUAGE (page 151) display.

2

Selecting a different language here may cause the following problems. Some characters of the le

names you entered may be gar- bled.

Files may not be accessible. Restoring the original language solves the above problems. Reading the les on the computer with a different language system may cause similar problems to those above.

CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and check how a specic tempo sounds.

The metronome starts by pressing the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below). To stop the metronome, press the [START/STOP] button again.

This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of a song or an accompaniment style.

Using the Metronome

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

METRONOME

START STOP

The sound, volume level, and the beat (time signature) of the metronome can all be changed (page 148).

Adjusting the Tempo

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

TAP TEMPO

TEMPO

RESET

Songs and accompaniment styles have been given default (initial) tempo settings, designed to best suit the song/style.

TEMPO

RESET

TAP TEMPO

EXIT

Press either the TEMPO [ ] button or the [ ] button.

Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo.

When you change the tempo, both tempos of the current song and style will be changed to the same tempo. To restore their respective default (initial) tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the Tempo Indications MAIN display (page 52) for more about tempo.

1 2

Press this to close the TEMPO display.

END

51CVP-900

Basic Operations Organizing Your Data

52

Tap Tempo

This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style. Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping.

Tempo Indications MAIN Display There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below.

Hitting the [TAP TEMPO] button produces a tapping sound. You can change this sound, if desired (page 149).

n You can also use Tap Tempo to automatically start the song or accompaniment style at the desired tempo. While both the song and accompaniment style are stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button several times, and the selected accompaniment style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. While a song is set to Sync. Start stand-by (page 61, 75), tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button starts the song playback in the same manner. For songs and styles in 2/4 and 4/4 time, tap four times; for 3/4 time, tap three times; for 5/4 time, tap ve times.

TEMPO

RESET

TAP TEMPO

Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice to change the tempo.

1 Playback the song or the accompaniment style (page 60, 75).

2

Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for t he currently selected song (unless the tempo has been changed manually).

Indicates the current tempo for the selected song, accompaniment style or the metronome which is now playing back. When nothing is playing back (stopped), this

indicates the tempo for the selected style. When the song and style are played back simultaneously, the tempo of the style is automatically changed to match

the tempo of the song, and is displayed here. This tempo is used for recording when recording a song or accompaniment style.

Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected accompaniment style (unless the tempo has been changed manually).

CVP-900

Re

ference

Playing the Demos

The CVP-900 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the CVP-900.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

MENU

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BACK NEXT

H

G

MENU

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

2

-3 Press one of these buttons twice once to select the desired demo, and once again to start it.

2

-2 Use these to select different display pages.

Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting from the rst item at the top left of the display. This is available only from the FUNCTION page.

All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one at top left. The

VOICE

and

STYLE

pages do not have the

[AUTO]

button; however, all demo songs are played back in sequence. Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos (otherwise available in step 3 below).

2

-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category. Function Demos

....... These demonstrate each of the different functions on the CVP-900.

Voice Demos

............. These showcase the voices of the CVP-900.

Style Demos

.............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the CVP-900.

1

Pressing the [DEMO] button automatically plays back the Demo songs at random.

2

53CVP-900

Playing the Demos

54

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

EXIT

4

Relevant explanations are shown in the display.

END

Return to the MAIN screen.

F

J

I

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART ON OFF

H

G LAYER

LEFT

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

This example shows the Voices in the FUNCTION demo.

3

For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and the Demo starts playing.

Select the desired word or item by using the

[DATA ENTRY]

dial, then press the

[ENTER]

button or number buttons (

[1

]

,

[2

]

,etc.) to call it up.

Use the

[BACK][NEXT]

buttons in the introduction screen to call up the previ- ous or next page.

n

Press the SONG

[START/ STOP]

button to stop the Demo song. To start the Demo again from the point at which it was stopped, press the SONG

[START/ STOP]

button again. Rewind and fast-forward can also be used with the Demo songs (page 77).

CVP-900

Voices

The CVP-900 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings and brass and many, many more.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

VOICE

Selecting a Voice

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

VOICE

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BACK NEXT

H

G

END

EXIT

1

Select the desired voice group.

2

-3 Select the voice.

2

-1 Select the memory location of the voice (PRESET/USER/FLOPPY DISK).

Press this to start the demo of the selected voice. To stop the demo at any time, press this button again.

Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group.

Indicates that the display is for selecting the MAIN voice (page 25).

2

-2 Select the various pages in the current voice group.

3

Play the keyboard to hear the selected voice.

Press this to return to the

MAIN

display.

When you select a voice group, the last selected voice will automatically be selected.

n

Selecting a voice automati- cally selects the best-suited effect and other settings for that particular voice. You can disable this so that settings are not automatically selected (page 143).

n

You can set how much the volume of the voice changes according to your playing strength (page 141).

n

For a list of the available voices, refer to the separate Data List.

n

You can set whether the voice bank and program change numbers (MSB- LSB-Program Change num- ber at the right above the voice name) are displayed or not (page 149).

n

XG

is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 for- mat, and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure com- patibility of data well into the future.

2

55CVP-900

Voices

56

One-touch Piano Play

This convenient, easy-to-use feature completely and automatically recongures the entire CVP-900 for optimum piano performance. No matter what settings youve made from the panel, you can instantly call up the piano settings by a single button press.

PIANO button

This recongures all of the panel settings for playing the CVP-900 as a piano.

Voice Characteristics

The voice type and its dening characteristics are indicated above the voice name.

Natural!

These rich and luscious voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument sounds and are especially intended for playing piano and other keyboard parts. Since they use a completely independent sound source, you can play full, sustained chords even along with the accompaniment style and not have to worry about notes cutting off. They also take full advantage of Yamahas advanced sampling technology such as Stereo Sampling, Dynamic Sampling, Sustain Sampling, and Key-off Sampling.

Live!

These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound full of atmosphere and ambience.

Cool!

These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming.

Sweet!

These acoustic instrument sounds also benet from Yamahas sophisticated technology and feature a sound so nely detailed and natural, youll swear youre playing the real thing!

Drum

Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.

SFX

Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Live!Drums

These are high-quality drum sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic Sampling.

Organ Flutes!

This authentic organ voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ sounds.

Live! SFX

These are high-quality Latin percussion sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic sampling. They give you a broader and more versatile range of Latin percussion than the normal drum voices.

Keyboard Percussion

When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical. Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.

You can also use the metro- nome with this function (page 51).

PIANO

Even if you turn Piano Lock off, the piano settings are still active.

Piano Lock function The convenient Piano Lock function lets you lock the piano so that you dont inadvertently change the settings by pressing another button on the panel. Once locked, the CVP-900 stays in the piano mode, even if other buttons are pressed preventing you from accidently starting a song or accompaniment style during a piano concert.

Hold down the [PIANO] button for a short time, until a message appears prompting you to enable Piano Lock.

To enable Piano Lock, select OK.

To turn Piano Lock off, hold down the [PIANO] button again for a short time.

CVP-900

Voices

The CVP-900 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance.

Playing a layer of two voices

Playing two voices separately on the left and right sections of the keyboard

Playing three different voices one on the left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of two on the right

Layer Layering Two Different Voices

Layer/Left Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

VOICE PART ON OFF

H

G LAYER

LEFT

LAYER part MAIN part

LEFT part MAIN part

Split point

Left range Right range

LEFT part MAIN part

Split point LAYER part

Left range Right range

F

J

I

H

G

VOICE PART ON OFF

H

G LAYER

LEFT

EXITEND

1 Press this to turn the LAYER function on. To turn it off, press the button again.

There is an alternate way for quickly selecting both the MAIN and LAYER voices from the panel: While holding down one panel voice button, press a sec- ond voice button. The rst selected voice becomes the MAIN voice, and the second becomes the LAYER.

2 Select LAYER with the [G] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specic voice you want to play in a layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN) display (page 55).

Press this to return to the MAIN display.

57CVP-900

Voices

58

Left Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard

This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard.

REVERB Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a performance space anything from a small jazz club to a concert hall.

DSP The CVP-900 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part (MAIN/ LAYER/LEFT).

VARIATION (Not available for the Natural voices; page 89) This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 123), this lets you switch the rotor speed between slow and fast.

F

J

I

H

G

1 Set the LEFT to ON. Press this button again to set it to OFF.

H

G LAYER

LEFT

2 Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specic voice you want to play in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 55).

The split point can be freely set to any key on the key- board. To set it, call up the SPLIT POINT display by pressing the [I] (SPLIT POINT) button in the MAIN display. The operation steps are the same as in the STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT display of the FUNC- TION page (page 138).

n Each part (MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT) can have its own volume setting (page 62).

n You can also use the LAYER and LEFT functions together, to create a combi- nation layer/split. To do this, set separate voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard (as indicated), and set up a layer of two different voices on the right.

EXIT

END

Press this to return to the MAIN display.

Applying Voice Effects

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

VOICE EFFECT

REVERB DSP VARIATION

Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off. For explanations on each of the effects, see below.

The DSP and VARIATION effect types and the their depth can be selected and adjusted in the MIXING CON- SOLE display (page 123).

CVP-900

Voices

HARMONY/ECHO This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section of the keyboard (page 143).

MONO This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically. Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the Portamento effect, when playing in legato.

LEFT HOLD This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released the same effect as when the damper (sustain) pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall accompaniment sound.

Damper Pedal (Right)

Sostenuto Pedal (Center)

Left Pedal When the Piano voice is selected, pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play. The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected voice.

Foot Controller/Footswitch An optional Yamaha foot controller (FC7) or footswitch (FC4 or FC5) can be connected to the AUX PEDAL jack and used to control various functions assigned in the FUNCTION page (page 139).

You can add special empha- sis to melody lines you play over chords by using the Layer function with a mono- phonic voice. Set the Main voice to play polyphonically and set the Layer voice to play monophonically (MONO). In this case, the melody you play including the top notes of any chords sounds monophonically. Try this using the following voices. MAIN voice: Brass Section (polyphonic) + LAYER voice: Sweet Trump (monophonic)

The Portamento effect creates a smooth pitch glide between successively played notes.

Using the Pedals

You can also assign one of many other functions to these pedals (as well as the optional foot controller or footswitch). For example, you can use it to start/stop the accompaniment style, or use it to play Fill-ins (page 139).

Damper Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Left Pedal

The CVP-900 features three pedals.

Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held.

Certain voices in the [PER- CUSSION] and [XG] groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal.

When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain.

The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after releasing the keys.

Certain voices, such as [STRINGS] or [BRASS], sustain continuously when the sostenuto pedal is pressed.

Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION] and [XG] groups may not be affected by use of the sos- tenuto pedal.

When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note, the note will sustain as long as you hold the pedal.

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as the pedal is held, but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained.

The depth of the left pedal effect can be adjusted (page 139).

59CVP-900

60

Styles The CVP-900 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz, Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit. SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

A B C D

Playing a style

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BACK NEXT

H

G

A

E

D

C

B

To call up the [MAIN] dis- play, rst press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] but- ton.

2-2 Select a Style.

2-1 Select a location (Preset, User, Floppy Disk) for saving the style.

When youve opened a lower directorys display, this button (UP) lets you call up the next higher directory, from which you can select Style groups.

1

2 For a list of the available accompaniment styles, refer to the separate Data List (Style List).

CVP-900

Styles

STYLE

ACMPSYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit. SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

A B C D

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit.

A B C D

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

END

When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.)

Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on.

The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] button. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped.

You can set the key range for auto accompaniment (page 138).

You can begin the rhythm channels (tracks) of the Style by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

The rhythm channels of the style can also be started by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button. With the style stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button three, four or ve times (three for 3/4 time, four for 2/4 or 4/4 time, ve for 5/4 time).

Stop the style.

When you simultaneously play back accompaniment styles with a song, the accompaniment parts recorded to the song (chan- nels 9 - 16) are temporarily replaced by the selected accompaniment style let- ting you try out and use dif- ferent accompaniment with the song (page 76).

Turn ACMP off.

3

4

5

6

Sync. Start Enabling this lets you start the style simply by playing the keyboard.

As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section, the style starts. For details about chord ngerings, refer to page 63.

Accompaniment Style Characteristics The dening characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display.

Session! These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add spice and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate or even harmonically correct for all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on- bass chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment.

Piano Combo! These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs.

Pianist! These special styles provide piano-only accompaniment effectively recreating the left-hand performance of an accomplished pianist. Just by playing the proper chords with your left hand, you can automatically add complicated arpeggios and bass/chord patterns such as difcult-to-play stride piano parts.

61CVP-900

Styles

62

Playing a Styles Rhythm Channels only.

Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit. SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

A B C D

Rhythm starts.

1 Select a style (page 60). The Rhythm channels are part of the styles. Each style has different rhythm pat- terns.

Set to off.

3 Play along with the rhythm playback. The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped.

2

When selecting the style group PIANIST, the rhythm doesnt sound. When you want to use any of the styles, always make sure that ACMP is turned on.

Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button again to stop the rhythm playback.END

You can also start the rhythm simply by playing a key on the keyboard, if Sync Start is enabled (turn on the [SYNC.START] button).

BALANCE

PART

CHANNEL ON / OFF

BALANCE display

Adjust the output level of the Part.

Parts played from the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/ LEFT)

STYLE part (Auto Accompaniment section)

SONG part

MIC part

CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again.

Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data (page 158). The channels are assigned as shown below. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16

Call up the BALANCE display.

Call up the Channel ON/ OFF display.

CVP-900

Styles

The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of ngerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 139), and select the Chord Fingerings. The page shows how to play chords with your left hand.

SINGLE FINGER Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord ngerings described below are used.

MULTI FINGER The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ngerings, so you can use either type of ngering without having to switch ngering modes. If you want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the root of the chord.

FINGERED This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page.

FINGERED ON BASS This mode accepts the same ngerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play on bass chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C).

FULL KEYBOARD This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right.

AI FINGERED This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).

AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the CVP-900 will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You dont have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th and 11th chords cannot be played.

Chord Fingerings

For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left.

For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left.

Chord detection in the AI Full Keyboard mode occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords less than an 8th note in length may not be detected.

In Full Keyboard mode, chords are detected based on the lowest and second lowest notes you play. If the two lowest notes fall within a single octave, those two notes determine the chord. If the lowest note and the sec- ond lowest note are sepa- rated by more than one octave, the lowest note becomes the bass and the chord is determined from the second lowest note and the other notes played in the same octave.

AI Articial Intelligence

63CVP-900

Styles

64

* Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion.

Chord Name [Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Display for root C

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Ninth [9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C9

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [69] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C69

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M79] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM79

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7 11] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 CM7 11

Flatted fth [ 5] 1 - 3 - 5 C 5

Major seventh atted fth [M7 5] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CM7 5

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - 5 Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7aug

Minor [m] 1 - 3 - 5 Cm

Minor ninth [m9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 Cm9

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m79] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 Cm79

Minor seventh eleventh [m711] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Cm711

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM79] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM79

Minor seventh atted fth [m7 5] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Cm7 5

Minor major seventh atted fth [mM7 5] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CmM7 5

Diminished [dim] 1 - 3 - 5 Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C7

Seventh atted ninth [7 9] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7 9

Seventh add atted thirteenth [7 13] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 C7 13

Seventh ninth [79] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* C79

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7 11] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 C7 11

Seventh add thirteenth [713] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 C713

Seventh sharp ninth [7 9] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7 9

Seventh atted fth [7 5] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7 5

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2

Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for C chords)

C

Cm

C7

(

)

CM7

(

)

C9 C6 9

(

)

Caug Cm6 Cm7

(

)

Cm7 5 CmM7 5

Cm7 9

(

)

Cm9

CmM7

(

)

CmM7 9

(

)

Cdim Cdim7

C7 9

(

)

C7 13

(

)

C7 9

(

)

C7 13

Csus4

C7 5

C6

(

)

(

)

CM7 9 CM7 11

(

)

CM7 5C 5

(

)

C7 11 C7

9

(

)

C7aug

Cm7 11

(

)

(

)

CM7aug

(

)

C7sus4 Csus2

Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

For FINGERED, FIN- GERED ON BASS, and AI FINGERED, if you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the chord sound will be can- celed and only the rhythm instruments will continue playing (Chord Cancel function). This let you play back only the rhythm.

Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accom- paniment based only on the root.

A perfect fth (1 + 5) pro- duces accompaniment based on the root and the fth.

The auto accompaniment Style will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh).

You can also have the CVP-900 teach you how to play Fingered chords. From the CHORD FIN- GERING display (page 139), specify the chord you want to learn, and the notes you should press are indicated in the display.

CVP-900

Styles

The CVP-900 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional- sounding arrangement in your performance.

Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)

You can also use this func- tion to play only rhythms (page 62).

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit. SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

A B C D

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit.

A B C D

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

1 Select a style (page 60).

2-1 Turn the ACMP function on.

2-2 Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again.

2-3 Turn the SYNC. START function on.

3 The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section.

4

Press this button to add breaks.

If you press the [INTRO] button, you can play back an Intro section while an accompaniment is play- ing.

You can dynamically con- trol the level of the accompaniment by how softly or strongly you play the keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (page 138).

If you press the [SYNC. START] button while an accompaniment is play- ing, the accompaniment will stop and the CVP- 900 will enter Synchro- nized Start standby sta- tus.

You can also change style sections by using the pedal (page 139).

The Break section lets you add dynamic varia- tions and breaks in the rhythm of the accompani- ment, to make your per- formance sound even more professional. If you press the [BREAK] but- ton while an accompani- ment is playing, the ll-in will play back for one measure.

The indicator of the desti- nation section (MAIN A/ B/C/D) will ash while the Break is playing.

When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and the MAIN [A][B][C][D] button is pressed after the nal half beat (eighth note) of the measure, the ll-in will begin from the next measure.

2 Section button indications

[BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] but- tons LED is green

The section is not selected.

LED is red The section is cur- rently selected.

LED is off No section data; the section cannot be played.

Main sections can be shifted.

65CVP-900

Styles

66

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment section is played.

Fade-in/Fade-out The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in before starting the style, press the button again. To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 148).

Styles can also be started by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

You can select the Intro and Ending type by press- ing the [E] button in the MAIN window (page 67).

If you press the [INTRO] button while the ending is playing, the Intro section will begin playing after the ending is nished.

When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and you press a MAIN button while the ending is playing, ll-in accompaniment will immediately start playing, continuing with the Main section.

You can begin the accom- paniment by using the Ending instead of the Intro section. In this case, the auto accompaniment doesnt stop when the ending is nished.

If you select a different style while the style is not playing, the default tempo for that style is also selected. If the accompa- niment is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a differ- ent style.

When STOP ACMP is set to on and the accompani- ment is not playing, you can play both chords and bass in the Auto Accom- paniment section in the keyboard (page 138).

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit.

A B C D

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

END This switches to the ending section. When the ending is nished, the Style stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back.

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

1 Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on.

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit. SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

A B C D

2 Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when SYNC. STOP is turned on.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts.

You can also use the SYNC. STOP function by pressing the auto accompaniment section/left-hand range briey (page 138).

4 The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys.

5 Playing a chord with your left hand automatically restarts the auto accompaniment.

Press the [SYNC. STOP]/ [SYNC. START] button again to stop the accompaniment.

Synchro Stop cannot be set to on when the ngering mode is set to Full Key- board/AI Keyboard or the auto accompaniment on the panel is set to off.END

CVP-900

Styles

Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections Auto Fill In

A

E

D

C

B

E

D

Select a Intro

Select a Ending

3 Play the style using the Intro or Ending section (page 30, 31).

1

2

To call up the [MAIN] dis- play, rst press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button.

Fill A short phrase used to add variation to the style.

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit.

A B C D

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP 1

2 Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play (page 30, 31). Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections.

You can also add a ll-in by pressing the selected MAIN button again.

To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again.

You can temporarily disable Auto Fill In during a perfor- mance by pressing the next Main sections button twice quickly. END

67CVP-900

Styles

68

The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style youre playing. Each preset style has four pre-programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button.

Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING)

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit.

A B C D

SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4

1 Select a style (page 60).

2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ([1] - [4]).

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4

LED is green The One Touch Setting is not selected.

LED is off No One Touch Setting data. The button is not available.

LED is red The One Touch Setting is currently selected. 3 As soon as you play a

chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts.

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

4 Stop the Auto Accompaniment.

5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups (page 69).

Various settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected style can be instantly recalled. When the style is not playing, Auto Accompaniment and Sync. Start will automatically be turned on. For details about the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart).

CVP-900

Styles

Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections OTS Link The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section (A - D).

Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING) This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (four setups per style). For a list of One Touch Setting setup parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart).

AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

1 2 When you switch among the Main sections (A - D), the corresponding One Touch Setting will be called up automatically. The Main sections A, B, C, and D correspond to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively.

The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings (page 138): Immediately when you

press a section button. At the next measure (in

an accompaniment style), after you press a section button.

To cancel the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button again.END

MEMORY

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4

1 Select a style. 2 Set up the panel controls such as selecting a voice as required.

3 Press the [MEMORY] button.

END A message prompting you to save the current style will appear. Select YES to call up the STYLE display, then save the panel settings (page 39, 45).

Unless you store the panel settings here, the registered settings will be deleted when you select a different accompaniment style.

4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons:[1] through [4].

The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice, Harmony and Pedal settings.

69CVP-900

Styles

70

The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the instrument including voice, style, and One Touch Settings simply by selecting the desired song title. If you want to play a certain song but dont know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function will help you out. The recommended settings, which together make up a record, can also be edited and stored. This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall.

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music Music Finder

The MUSIC FINDER records and its contents is just one example of the recom- mended panel setups. You can also create your own Music Finder settings for your favorite songs and genres.

Keep in mind that Music Finder is a performance aid in that it automatically nds appropriate accompaniment styles and voices for your playing. Even though you can specify song titles, it does not actually contain song data.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

MUSIC FINDER

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

MUSIC FINDER

Select a record. For example, select the top record by pressing the [1] button to call up the recommended setups. The setting data shown here is referred to as a record.

All...........................Show all records. FAVORITE..............Show the records that have added to the Favorite page. SEARCH1,2 ...........Show the results by SEARCH function (page 71).

Sorting the records MUSIC ...... The record is sorted by song title. STYLE.......The record is sorted by style name. BEAT ........ The record is sorted by beat. TEMPO ..... The record is sorted by tempo.

Change the order of the records (ascending or descending).

Add the selected record to Favorite (Bookmark) page When you press the [H] button, the Add selected data to the favorite list? YES/NO message will be displayed. Select [YES] to add the selected page to FAVORITE page.

Search record(s). Enter the condition of the search in the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display (page 71). The results of SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the SEARCH 1 or SEARCH 2 page respectively.

Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT (page 72) display (for editing the selected record).

Turn TEMPO LOCK on/off. TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during style playback when selecting another record. The on/off setting affects all pages (ALL/FAVORITE/SEARCH 1/SEARCH 2).

Select a record by style name. When sorting the records by style name, press these buttons to move the cursor to the next /previous style. Simultaneously press the [] buttons to move the cursor to the rst record.

Select a record by song title. When sorting records by song title, use the [1] button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [] buttons to move the cursor to the rst record.

Show the number of records of each page.

1

2

3 Play the style (page 61). Records can be selected by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial and pressing the [ENTER] button.

CVP-900

Styles

Searching the Ideal Setups Music Finder Search You can search the record by music title or keywords. The results appears in the display.

[A] MUSIC Searches by music or song title. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the song title. When you enter the song title (page 46), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words.

[B] KEYWORD Searches by keyboard. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the keyword. When you enter the keyword (page 46), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words. You can search several

different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. The search function nds and displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords.

[C] STYLE Searches by style name. Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style. This convenient function lets you nd all songs that use a certain accompaniment style.

[D] BEAT Searches by beat or rhythmic feel.

[E] SEARCH AREA Selects a specic location for searching. You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2 selections.

[F]~[H] CLEAR Clears the entered item at left.

[1] TEMPO FROM You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search. Press the [] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum.

[2]TEMPO TO You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search. Press the [] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum.

[3]~[5] GENRE Selects the specic music genre for searching. The available range includes all genres (ANY), the preset genres, and any genres youve entered yourself (page 70).

[8] CANCEL Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Start searching the record. The results that satisfy all the conditions appear in the SEARCH page. For details about the search settings in this display, see below.

1 Press the [I] (SEARCH 1) button or [J] (SEARCH 2) button in the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Enter the conditions for the search (see below), then start search by using [START SEARCH] button.

The STYLE FILE SELECT display can only be used to select the style name for searching; it cannot be used to call up the actual accom- paniment style.

71CVP-900

Styles

72

Editing Records Music Finder Record Edit From this display, you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your preferences. You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records.

[A] MUSIC Selects the music or song title for editing. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the music or song title, then edit the name as desired.

[B] KEYWORD Selects the keyword for editing. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the keyword, then edit it as desired. You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator (comma) between each.

[C] STYLE Selects the style name for editing. Always enter the name when a new record is registered. Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired style you want to change/clear/register.

[D] BEAT Selects the beat (time signature) for editing. When another le is selected by pressing the [C] button, the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected le.

[E] FAVORITE Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page (page 70).

[F]~[H] CLEAR Clears the entered item at left.

[I] DELETE RECORD Clears the selected record. The deleted record number becomes empty. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES .................. Press this to clear the record and close the display. NO .................. Press this to close the display without clearing the record. CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

[J] NEW RECORD Registers a new record. The smallest available empty record number is used for registering. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES .................. Press this to register the record and close the display. NO .................. Press this to close the display without registering the record. CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

You can also change/clear a preset record. To avoid chang- ing/clearing the record, register the record as a new record after editing.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

1 Press the [8] (RECORD EDIT) button in the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Change/clear the record data. You can also register new records. For details about all settings and operations, see below.

All Music Finder records can be stored together as a single le (page 151). When calling up a stored le, a message appears prompting you to replace or append the records as desired. Replace:

All Music Finder records cur- rently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected le.

Append: The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers.

The STYLE FILE SELECT display can only be used to select the style name for record editing; it cannot be used to call up the actual accompaniment style.

Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the accompaniment style itself.

The maximum number of records is 2500, including internal records.

CVP-900

Styles

[1] TEMPO Determines the tempo for the selected style. When changing the style with the [C] button, the tempo is automatically changed to that of the changed style.

[3]~[5] GENRE Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned. The available range includes all preset genres as well as any youve entered yourself.

[6] GENRE NAME For entering a genre name. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the genre name, then edit the name as desired. A maximum of 200 genre names can be stored. The genre name you input becomes effective when the current record is edited (overwritten) by pressing the [8] (OK) button, or when a new record is registered by pressing the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record, the input genre name is deleted.

[8] OK Executes all editing and changes to the record. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES .................. Press this to replace the record and close the display. NO .................. Press this to close the display without replacing the record. CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

[8] CANCEL Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display.

To maintain the edited and registered data, make sure to save all Music Finder records as a le (page 151). If no saved, the data will be lost when another Music Finder le is called up or the factory-programmed settings are restored (page 151).

73CVP-900

74

Song Playback Here youll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances youve recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 94), and commercially available song data. You can use this highly versatile feature in a variety of ways playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song, as well as practicing and learning new music with the Guide (page 79) and Repeat (page 78) functions. You can also display the music notation and lyrics in the LCD. If you connect a microphone to the CVP-900, you can sing along with the song and have vocal harmony parts added automatically (page 128).

Internal songs (Song Book)

Song data on included disk (50 greats for the Piano)

Commercially available song data

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General MIDI).

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamahas XG format. XG is a signicant enhancement of the GM system level 1 standard, providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect sections and effect types.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamahas DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) format.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamahas original MIDI le format.

Songs you recorded (page 94) and stored to the CVP-900 or disk.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)

TRACK 2 (L)

TRACK 1 (R)

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

Compatible Song Types

Commercially available music data is subject to copyright restrictions, and is intended only for your own personal use.

For more information on the song le types compatible with the Clavinova, see page 159.

CVP-900

Song Playback

Playing the Internal Songs

Song Playback

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

BACK

H

G

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

BACK

H

G

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

END

2-2 Open a folder and select a song to be played back.

2-1 Select the PRESET tab with the [BACK] button.

You can enable the Synchro Start for the song by simul- taneously pressing the [TOP] button and the SONG [START/STOP] but- ton. The song starts as soon as you play the key- board. You can also use this function along with the Styles Synchro Start func- tion (page 61).

n You can have the volume automatically fade in and fade out at the beginning and end of the song. Simply press the [FADEIN/OUT] button at the start of song playback to fade in the song, and press it again at the end of the song to fade out.

Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 51) or the [TAP TEMPO] button. You can even change the playback speed by tapping out the tempo simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice.

1

2

3 The song starts.

To stop the song immediately, press the button again.

Press the button in order to go back to the previous screen.

START / STOP

EXIT

If the MAIN screen (at left) is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

n You can also make a variety of other settings (such as tempo, voice selection, set- tings for the practice func- tions, etc.) and have them automatically called up when you play back the song (page 106).

Songs can also be played back con- tinuously. Set SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON from the SONG SETTING dis- play (page 137).

Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 151) is the same as that of the le name of the song that you are playing back.

75CVP-900

Song Playback

76

Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 - 16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels allowing you to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of the songs chord data.

[ACMP] button .................. ...ON [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON

1 Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.

2 Select the desired accompaniment style.

3 Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

4 While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE section buttons.) Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections.

The style automatically stops when the song nishes or is stopped.

The accompaniment stops when you stop the song. If the accompaniment style is playing and you start the song, the accompaniment automatically stops. How- ever, for internal songs that use accompaniment styles, the accompaniment style is not stopped.

END

Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback.

CVP-900

Song Playback

Playing Back Songs on Disk Insert the disk into the drive.

The method for playing back is the same as in the Playing the Internal Songs instructions (page 75), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display.

Other Playback-related Operations Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward

Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specic Channels

CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press that channels button again.

Before proceeding, make sure to read the section Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk (page 6).

n You can set whether or not the Clavinova automatically calls up the rst disk song when a disk is inserted (page 150).

n Some song data for the Clavinova has been recorded with special free tempo settings. During play- back of such song data, the measure numbers shown in the display will not corre- spond to the actual mea- sure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of the song has been played back.

n Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song.

Insert the disk shutter side rst and label face up.

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT

NEW SONG SYNC.START

During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped, pressing this button returns the song to the beginning.

Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button.

When BAR is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. When PHRASE MARK is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.

Phrase Mark This data species a certain location in the song data.

SONG POSITION display

PHRASE MARK is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the [J] button to toggle between BAR and PHRASE MARK, then use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark.

BALANCE

PART

CHANNEL ON / OFF

Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 62).

Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below).

Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data. The chan- nels are assigned as shown below for the CVP-900. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16

77CVP-900

Song Playback

78

This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play that part yourself.

This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly.

Muting Specic Parts Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)

TRACK 2 (L)

TRACK 1 (R)

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

2

1 Select the song to be played back (page 74).

Use this button to turn on/off the right-hand part.

Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part.

Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts (all but the right hand/left hand).

Start the song. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 51).

All tracks are automatically set to on when selecting a different song.

3 To stop the song, press the button again.

START / STOPEND

You can change the channel assignments for Track 1 and Track 2 (page 137), letting you specify which parts are muted when pressing the [TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/ [EXTRA TRACKS] buttons.

Repeat Playback of a Specic Range

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT

NEW SONG SYNC.START

START / STOP

2

1 Play back the song (page 75, 77). You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by pressing the [REPEAT] but- ton, then use the [FF] but- ton to move to the desired end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again.

4 Stop the song.

To cancel the Repeat function, press the button again.

REPEAT

Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to start (Point A). Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to end (Point B).

3 After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly. Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP] button returns to point A.

Point B cannot be selected unless Point A has been selected rst.

n Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the song.

n The specied A and B points will be erased when selecting a different song number, cancelling the Repeat function, or select- ing a different repeat mode such as Phrase Repeat or repeat in Song Chain Play (page 137).

END

CVP-900

Song Playback

These fun features make it easy to learn new music. The key guide lamps indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold them down. Also, when you sing and play along with a song using a connected microphone, the Clavinova automatically adjusts the timing of the song to match your vocal performance.

Practice Functions For keyboard performance

Follow Lights When this is selected, you can see which notes you should play by watching the key guide lamps. They light up in time with music, showing you when to play a note. You can also practice at your own pace since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes correctly.

Accompaniment Guide If the song data youre using contains chord data and the [ACMP] button is turned on, you can use the guide lamps (page 137) to help you play chords as well. Watch the guide lamps and try playing the appropriate chords.

Any Key With this function, you can play the melody of a song simply by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. As long as you play the key in time with the music, the melody ows smoothly with the song.

For sing-along performance

Karao-Key This convenient function lets you control the song and accompaniment playback with just one nger, while you sing along. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with the music any key is ne and the accompaniment parts of the song follow your playing. This lets you control the timing and tempo of the song and accompaniment to perfectly match your singing performance.

Vocal CueTIME Similar to Follow Lights above, you can see which notes to sing by watching the key guide lamps. The Clavinova follows your singing and automatically adjusts the timing and tempo of the song to match your vocal performance.

Using the Practice Functions Guide

You can turn the key guide lamps on/off from the SONG SETTING display (page 137).

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

Key guide lamp

You can also determine the timing by which the key guide lamps light to t your playing preference (Guide Lamp Timing; page 137).

n If you want to learn how to play certain chords, use the Chord Tutor function (page 139).

n The Accompaniment Guide function cannot be used if the chord ngering method is set to Single Finger, Full keyboard or AI Full Key- board.

79CVP-900

Song Playback

80

Practicing Music with the Guide Functions

A

E

D

C

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Selects the specic practice function.

Turns the key guide lamps on/off.

Determines the timing by which the key guide lamps light. JUST .....The guide lamp lights in time

with the music, at the same time you should play the appropriate notes.

NEXT .....The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music, indicating the notes you should play next. The guide lamp ashes if you do not play the key with the correct timing.

Determines whether phrase mark sections in the song will be repeatedly played back or not. When this is set to ON, the specied measures of the phrase play back repeatedly. Call up the SONG POSITION display by pressing either the [REW] button or the [FF] button, and select PHRASE MARK by pressing the [J] button. Set the desired phrase mark number by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.

2 Select the desired song (page 75, 77) and mute the track you wish to practice (page 78).

1 Select the desired practice function from the SONG SETTING page in the FUNCTION display (page 137).

4

3

5

To turn the practice function, press the button again.

GUIDEEND

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

Start the song and try playing the part youve muted. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 51).

Stop the song.

For details on the SONG SET- TING display, see page 137.

n The guide lamps light according to song channel recorded to Tracks 1 and 2 and the chord data in the song (when such data is included). Normally, you can leave the AUTO SET CH function set to ON, and the song channel will automati- cally be set. If the results aren't satisfactory, you'll need to match the Channel Setting TRK1 CH and TRK2 CH parameters to the appropriate right- and left-hand parts.

n

Vocoder This lets you indicate or play the harmony notes from the keyboard.

n Phrase Mark This data species a certain location in the song data.

n Track 1 or Tracks 1 & 2 are automatically selected for practicing when calling the practice function as long as you havent muted the track to be practiced.

n The key guide lamps some- times light an octave or two lower/higher than the actual pitch. Any notes outside of the 88-key range cannot be indicated by the key guide lamps.

n If the right- and left-hand parts recorded to the song data have not been properly separated, the practice func- tions may not work as expected.

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

Determines the channel for playing back the harmony sound of the Vocoder.

CVP-900

Song Playback

With this feature, you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays. This can be used with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs.

Displaying Music Notation Score

A

E

D

C

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Select the desired song (page 75, 77).

Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range. Depending on other settings, this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go to the detailed setting display (shown below; use the [8] buttons) and set the LEFT CH. parameter to any channel except AUTO. Or, go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function menu (page 137) and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except OFF.

Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range. Channel 1 is automatically selected when [TRACK1] is set to [OFF] from the SONG SETTING display (page 137).

Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed.

Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch).

Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation. The resolutions are selected in order: X-LARGE (Extra Large), LARGE, MEDIUM, and SMALL.

The displayed notation is generated by the Clavinova based on the song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as com- mercially available sheet music of the same song especially when displaying notation of complicated pas- sages or many short notes.

n Some song data for the Clavinova has been recorded with special free tempo settings. For such song data, the tempo, beat, measure and music nota- tion will not be displayed correctly.

n [RIGHT] and [LEFT] cannot be turned off at the same time.

n The note name is indicated at the left of the note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indi- cation may be moved to the top left of the note.

n You can increase the num- ber of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be displayed (parts, lyrics, chords, etc.).

n When accidentals (sharp and ats) and notes cannot be displayed on one line, they are displayed in the next line from the middle of the measure.

n The notation functions can- not be used to create song data by inputting notes. For information on creating song data, see page 98.

If the MAIN screen (at left) is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] but- ton.

3

This calls up the detailed setting display for notation. For details, see the next page.

Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed.

2

81CVP-900

Song Playback

82

Detailed Settings for Notation

[1] LEFT CH/[2] RIGHT CH This determines the Left channel (channel for the left-hand part) and Right channel (channel for the right-hand part). This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected. AUTO .........................The channels for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically setting the parts

to the same channel as the channel which is specied in the SONG SETTING display of the Function menu (page 137).

1-16 ............................Assigns the part to the specied channel, 1- 16. OFF (LEFT CH only)....No channel assignment.

[3], [4] KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position, allowing you to transpose key at any point within a song. For a list of the key signatures, with their relative minor keys and accidentals, see the chart below.

[5] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value which is used in the song.

Note resolution: 1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/16 note, 1/32 note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/8 note triplet, 1/16 note triplet, 1/32 note triplet

When LEFT and RIGHT are set to the same channel, the notation of the right-hand notes and left-hand notes are displayed in piano format (two connected staves).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The note indicates the root note of the major key, and the note indicates the root of the relative minor.

C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F min) E Maj (C min) B Maj (G min) F Maj (D min) C Maj (A min)

C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F min) E Maj (C min) B Maj (G min) F Maj (D min)

Key Signatures and Accidentals

Short notes and ornamented notes (such as trills and grace notes) which are shorter than the Note resolu- tion will not be displayed in the notation.

CVP-900

Song Playback

[6] NOTE NAME Select the Note Name type when NOTE (page 81) is set to ON.

ABC ................. Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).

Fixed Do .......... Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language (page 50). English..............Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti French ..............Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si Italian...............Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si German............Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si Spanish.............Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si Japanese ...........

Movable Do ..... Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of Sol would be indicated as Do. As with Fixed Do, the indication differs depending on the selected language.

[7] COLOR NOTE When this is set to ON, the notes in the display appear in color (C: red, D: yellow, E: green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: white).

[8] OK This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation. You can also execute this by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel.

[8] CANCEL This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings. You can also execute this by pressing the [EXIT] button or [RECORD] button on the panel.

You can select the display pages (one before and after) by the using the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons or the pedal (page 139).

83CVP-900

Song Playback

84

This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back making it easy to sing along with your performance or song playback.

Displaying the Lyrics

A

E

D

C

B

1 Select the desired song (page 75, 77).

3

The lyrics can also be shown on a connected TV (page 144, 153).

5 The color of the lyrics changes as the song plays.

Stop the song. To return to the previous page, press the button.

EXIT

END

If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed.

The language used for lyr- ics display depends on the particular lyric data. If the lyrics are garbled or unread- able, you can remedy this by changing the LYRICS LANGUAGE setting from the SONG SETTING dis- play (page 137).

Start the song.

4

2

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

Select the BACK GROUND setting.

When the back ground color is specied in the song data, the BACK GROUND setting cannot be changed.

The lyrics can be changed (page 109).

If the selected song con- tains chord data, chord names are displayed with the lyrics.

CVP-900

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the Clavinova just as you want selecting specic voices, styles, effect settings etc. and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button.

This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will remember them for you.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Registering Panel Setups Registration Memory

Keep in mind that songs or styles on disk cannot registered to Registration Memory. If you want to register a disk-based song or style, copy the relevant data to USER in the SONG/STYLE display (page 39) and register the data separately.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

END

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

1 Set up the panel controls as desired. For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart).

Select the desired parameter groups for the settings you want to register. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to navigate in this display. To register a parameter group, checkmark the corresponding box. Groups left without checkmarks will not be included in the Registration Memory setting. This allows you to maintain certain settings, even when switching among Registration Memory presets. You can also use the Freeze function (page 87) to override the Registration Memory changes letting you prevent certain panel settings from being changed.

Enters a checkmark to the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button.

Removes the checkmark from the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button.

Cancels the registration and returns to the MAIN display. You can also use the [EXIT] button.

Press the desired number button for registering the settings.

3

Any data that was previ- ously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button (indicator is green or red) will be erased and replaced by the new settings.Indicator is green ..... The panel setting is registered, but not selected.

Indicator is red......... The panel setting is registered and is currently selected. Indicator is off.......... The panel setting is not registered.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY1 2 3 4 5 6 7 82

The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation explained on the next page.

85CVP-900

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory

86

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single le.

REGISTRATION EDIT display The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green. From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets.

Select ...............Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8] buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on (indicator is red).

Name ...............This operation is the same as that in Naming Files and Folders (page 42) in Basic Operations Organizing Your Data.

Delete ..............This operation is the same as that in Deleting Files/Folders (page 44) in Basic Operations Organizing Your Data.

Keep in mind that the size of the Registration bank les and the memory space they occupy depends on the amount of functions set in each.

BANK 01

All settings registered to buttons [1]- [8] are referred to as a bank. The banks can be saved to USER or FLOPPY DISK as Registration bank les.

F

J

I

H

G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and [EXIT] button to call up the MAIN display.

2 Save the settings youve made to the Registration Memory buttons as a single Registration bank le (page 45).

1

The REGISTRATION EDIT display appears. For details on this display, see below.

The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION BANK display by pressing the [8] (UP) button and save the data (page 45).

CVP-900

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory

You can recall all of the panel settings youve made or only those you specically want or need. For example, if you de-select STYLE in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you change the Registration Memory preset.

Recalling the Registered Settings Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 86). Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings.

Selecting the Freeze Settings

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup

You can program your Registration Memory presets to be called up in sequence, in any order you desire. Once programmed, the presets 1 - 8 can be selected in sequence with the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal (page 142).

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MENU

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select the Freeze settings.

Enters a checkmark to the selected box.

2

3 Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specied in the Freeze page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.

4 Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings.

Removes the checkmark from the selected box.

Call up the FREEZE page from the REGIST.SEQUENCE/ FREEZE/VOICE SET screen (page 142).

87CVP-900

88

Editing Voices Sound Creator The CVP-900 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once youve created a voice, you can save it as a USER voice for future recall.

The Voice can be edited in realtime while playing back a song/style.

Keep in mind that adjust- ments made to the param- eters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the original settings of the voice.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

SOUND CREATOR

Operation

NATURAL VOICE REGULAR VOICE ORGAN FLUTES

F

J

I

H

G

DIGITAL STUDIO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

1 Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the voice you wish to edit.

Indicates the parameters available for editing in this display. These correspond to the parameters/values shown at the bottom of the display.

Select the desired menu by pressing the [NEXT]/[BACK] button.

Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving the edited voice as a User voice (page 45).

Select the desired menu. The selected menu is highlighted.

Can be used during editing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited voice.

4 Save the edited voice to the USER drive (Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 45).

The voice can also be selected in the SOUND CREATOR display.

2 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button.

3 Edit the voice parameters. The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail, starting on page 90 (Natural/ Regular Voice) and page 93 (Organ Flutes).

The settings are lost if the edited parts voice is switched to another voice. Important data should be saved to User Drive or oppy disk.

5 Press the [USER] button to select the edited voice, and play the keyboard.

CAUTION

CVP-900

Editing the voice Sound Creator

SOUND CREATOR Parameters (Natural/Regular Voices)

The parameters for Organ Flutes, see page 93.

The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display.

PIANO Determines the parameters unique to piano sounds, such as tuning curve or sustain sampling. This page is available only when the Natural piano voice is selected.

COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave.

SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice (Regular voice only).

EFFECT/EQ Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings.

HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings.

Common parameter Other location

MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 59

PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 122

LEFT PEDAL TYPE CONTROLLER (FUNCTION) page 139

LEFT PEDAL SETTING CONTROLLER (FUNCTION) page 139

FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 122

FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 122

REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 123

CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 123

DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 58

DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 123

DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 58,123

EQ LOW GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 125

EQ HIGH GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 125

HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143

HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143

HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143

HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143

HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143

HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143

Natural Voices and Regular Voices Built into the CVP-900 are two different tone generation sources, Natural and XG. The Natural tone generation source and its voices feature a huge amount of wave memory, giving you enormous and nely detailed expressive power over the sound. The XG source (which powers the Regular voices) provide maximum compatibility with a wide variety of devices and song data.

The maximum amount of polyphony for each tone generation source is set up to best enhance your performance. In general, the songs and styles are played back using the XG source, while the Natural voices are played from the keyboard allowing you to play the Natural voices with full polyphony, even if the song and style data exceeds the polyphonic limit.

* Depending on the particular style selected, a Natural voice may be used for the accompaniment. Usually, songs are played back using the XG voices (page 160); however, you can have them automatically re-voiced using the exceptionally rich and realistic sounds exclusive to the CVP-900 (page 121).

The available parameters differ depending on the selected voice type, Regular or Natural (see below).

Keep in mind that there are certain parameters whose Sound Creator settings affect only the Main parts voice.

Voices sounded with the XG source are divided into two groups. One is the original set of Clavinova voices (Cool!, Sweet!, Live!, Live!Drums, Organ Flutes), and the other is the conven- tional XG set.

Natural! Cool! Sweet! Live! Live!Drums OrganFlutes! XG

Clavinova-exclusive voices GM/XG-compatible voices

Natural voices (sounded by Natural tone generation source)

Regular voices (sounded by XG tone generation source)

Used mainly for keyboard-played voices

For keyboard-played voices, song/style playback*

89CVP-900

Editing the voice Sound Creator

90

PIANO (Natural Piano Voice has been selected) The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 88.

COMMON The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 88.

SOUND (Regular Voice only) The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 88.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

These controls are used to adjust the brilliance of the tone. This setting affects all Natural voices globally. When other than piano voice (Natural) is selected, set this on EFFECT page. For details, see the EFFECT page (page 92).

Determines the tuning curve, especially for piano voices. Select FLAT if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices.

STRETCH .. Tuning curve particularly for pianos

FLAT .......... Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range

Determines the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal.

Determines the depth of string resonance.

The available parameters differ depending on the selected voice.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Set the volume of the current edited voice.

Set the portamento time of each part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE) (Regular Voice only) (page 122).

Determines the touch sensitivity, or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. 0 Produces more dramatic

level drops, the more softly you play.

64 Normal response. 127 Produces high volume for

any playing strength (xed).

Shift the octave range of the selected voice up or down in octaves. When the Main or Layer parts voice is used, the M/LYR parameter is available; when the Left parts voice is used, the LEFT parameter is available.

The parameters are the same as for CONTROLLER display. For details, see page 139.

This determines whether the voice is played monophonically (Regular Voice only) (page 59).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Determines the lter, EG, and vibrato settings (see below).

CVP-900

Editing the voice Sound Creator

FILTER FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range.

EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.

ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The higher the value, the slower the attack.

DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher the value, the slower the decay.

RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release.

VIBRATO

DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato.

SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).

DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset.

In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects.

Cutoff frequencyVolume

Frequency (pitch)

Cutoff rangeThese frequencies are passed by the filter.

BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the lter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound.

Resonance

Harmonic Content Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance), set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect.

onance Volume

Frequency (pitch)

Time

Level

Key on Key off

ATTACK RELEASEDECAY

If RELEASE is set to a large value, the sustain becomes long.

VIBRATO Creates a wavering in the sound by periodically chang- ing the pitch.

DEPTH

SPEED

DELAY

Time

Level

91CVP-900

Editing the voice Sound Creator

92

EFFECT/EQ The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 88.

HARMONY The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 88.

The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 144.

Determines the effect type (Reverb/ Chorus/DSP). When a regular voice is selected, the DSP type and Variation are set in two separate menus. For information on the effect structure, see page 126; for a list of available effect types, refer to the separate Data List.

Determines the brilliance of the tone, when a Natural voice is selected. This can also be set from the PIANO page (page 90), when a piano voice is selected. Metallic .........Sharp metallic tone Bright ............Bright tone Normal ..........Standard tone Mellow...........Soft and mellow tone Dark...............Dark tone

The same as the Mixing Console on page 123.

If you select [Bright] or [Metallic] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. In this case, raising the [MASTER VOLUME] may result in distortion. If this happens, lower the vol- ume accordingly.

SPEED parameter is added when selecting VIBE ROTOR DSP type. This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato when you select the Vibraphone voice, rec- reating the effect of a vibe rotor pedal.

This parameter enables you to select whether the sound is sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (PIANO LIKE), or the sound is sustained only while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone (NORMAL) (for Vibraphone voice).

NATURAL VOICE

The same as the Mixing Console on page 123.

REGULAR VOICE

Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands.

CVP-900

Editing the voice Sound Creator

Organ Flutes In addition to the many organ voices in the ORGAN voice category, the CVP-900 has an ORGAN FLUTES voice. The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 88.

Parameters

Organ Type This parameter species the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage.

Rotary SP Speed The Rotary SP Speed ([C]) button alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see DSP Type below), and the VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on (the Rotary SP Speed button has the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button).

Vibrato On/Off This ([G]) button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or OFF.

Vibrato Depth Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth ([H]) button. The button sequentially selects a depth of 1, 2, or 3.

Footage The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ utes. The term footage is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16 setting determines the lowest pitched component of the voice, while the 1 setting determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume of the corresponding footage. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds.

Volume (VOL) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume.

Response (RESP) The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound, increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value the slower the swell and release.

Vibrato Speed Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above.

Mode The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the rst notes played and held simultaneously; while the rst notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes.

Attack (4, 2 2/3, 2) The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice. The 4, 2 2/3 and 2 controls increase or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound.

Length (LENG) The LENGTH control affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay.

Reverb Depth Chorus Depth DSP on/off DSP Depth

For details about the digital effects, see pages 58, 123.

DSP Type Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice. Normally this will be one of the fteen available Rotary Speaker effects. If any other type of effect is selected, the Rotary SP Speed ([C]) button in the FOOTAGE/VOL/ATTACK display will not control rotary speaker speed. Instead, it will have the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button.

Variation Variation Determines whether the DSP variation will be set to Slow or Fast when the Organ Flutes voice is selected (when the Voice Set function is ON page 143).

Value Sets the DSP variation parameter value (e.g., LFO Freq for a Rotary Speaker effect) when the DSP variation is turned on.

EQ Low EQ High

The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands.

Operation

Adjust the Footage.

The tremolo and trill effects set via the Harmony/Echo function (page 143) do not affect the Organ Flutes sound.

Use button [1] to adjust the 16 or 5 1/3 footage. You can select the desired footage (16 or 5 1/3) with the [D] button.

Select or adjust the parameters (see below).

93CVP-900

94

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs

Song Creator With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 95), which lets you record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 96), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording (page 98), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects, auto accompaniment parts, and Vocal Harmony. The recorded song can be stored to internal memory or oppy disk (page 39, 45).

About Song Recording

Quick Recording (page 95) This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano song you are practicing. You can select from three parts: right hand, left hand and auto accompaniment. For example, you can record only your right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right hand and the auto accompaniment.

Multi Recording (page 96) This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance.

Step Recording (page 98) This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difcult to play.

Song Editing (page 104) The CVP-900 also lets you edit the songs youve recorded by the Quick Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)

TRACK 2 (L)

TRACK 1 (R)

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT GUIDE

NEW SONG SYNC.START

DIGITAL RECORDING

The internal memory capacity of the Clavinova is about 3.3MB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD oppy disks is about 720KB and 1.44MB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all le types of the Clavinova (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together.

The microphone input signal can- not be recorded.

Songs recorded on the CVP-900 are automatically recorded as SMF (Standard MIDI File format 0) data. For details on SMF see page 159.

Playback of the recorded song data can be transmitted from MIDI OUT, letting you play the sounds of a connected external tone genera- tor (page 146).

The volume level of each channel of the song can be adjusted from the Mixing Console and the set- tings can be saved. Moreover, even after youve set a voice for your keyboard play during recording, you can record voice selections, so that the voice changes automati- cally during playback (page 106).

CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

This is the easiest recording method perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song youre practicing, so you can check your progress.

Play back your new song To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 107). Press the [6] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 39, 45).

Quick Recording

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT

NEW SONG SYNC.START

When creating a new song: When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance:

1 Select the desired song (page 75, 77).

1

2 Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song. If you want to record to the Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON. Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well.

3 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button corresponding to the track you want to record. You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the same time.

To record your keyboard performance: Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button. To record the auto accompaniment performance: Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.

To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.

If the LAYER or LEFT button is on before pressing the REC button, the corre- sponding Layer and Left parts are automatically recorded to different channels.

The performance of track 1/2 is recorded to the channel specied in the SONG SET- TING display (page 137).

4 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/ STYLE [START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by pressing down the pedal, if the song start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 139).

To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again. Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the pedal, if the song start/ stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 139).

END

To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] but- ton again.

You can also use the metro- nome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded.

You can overdub a second right-hand performance onto Track 2 after recording the rst right-hand performance (including the layer voices) on Track 1. To do this, set the [LEFT] button to OFF and repeat steps 2 and 3.

REC EXTRA TRACKS

(STYLE) TRACK 2

(L) TRACK 1

(R)

Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance. If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal mem- ory (USER drive) or oppy disk (page 39, 45).

CAUTION

95CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

96

This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below.

About the accompaniment style parts Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used. Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others. Chord ........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices. Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir. Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.

Channels Parts (default settings) Available parts Channels Parts

(default settings) Available parts

1 Voice MAIN Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI

9 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1

Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI

2 Voice MAIN 10 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2

3 Voice MAIN 11 Accompaniment style BASS

4 Voice MAIN 12 Accompaniment style CHORD1

5 Voice MAIN 13 Accompaniment style CHORD2

6 Voice MAIN 14 Accompaniment style PAD

7 Voice MAIN 15 Accompaniment style PHRASE1

8 Voice MAIN 16 Accompaniment style PHRASE2

Multi Recording

REC TOP START / STOP REW FF REPEAT

NEW SONG SYNC.START

REC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

When creating a new song: When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance:

1 Select the desired song (page 75, 77).

1

2 Select the desired channel for recording (set it to REC) simultaneously holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1] - [8]. Several channels can be selected at the same time. REC ......................... Enables recording for the channel ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel OFF......................... Mutes the channel To cancel or disable recording, press the [REC] button once again.

The part is automatically selected when setting the several channels to REC at the same time.

CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

D

C

3 Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded. This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the recording channels selected in step #2. For a list of the initial default assignments, see page 96.

When selecting the MIDI part Setting a single channel

to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI chan- nels 1 - 16 is recorded. When using an external MIDI keyboard or control- ler to record, this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device.

Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or control- ler to record, this records data only over the set MIDI channel meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel.

A single part (with the exception of MIDI parts) can- not be assigned to several channels.

4 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The recording can be started/stopped by pressing the pedal if the recording punch in/out function is set to the pedal (page 103).

5 To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. You can also use the pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 103). To pause, press the SONG

[START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] but- ton again.

You can also use the metro- nome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded.

6 Play back your new song. To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song.

To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above. You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a nished song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 107). Press the [6] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 39, 45).

END

Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance. If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal mem- ory (USER drive) or oppy disk (page 39, 45).

The settings of the recorded parts is stored temporarily until you execute Quick Recording, select a song, or turn the power off.

CAUTION

97CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

98

This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately.

Operation

Recording Individual Notes Step Record

DIGITAL STUDIO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

1 Select an existing song (page 75, 77) to which you want to add parts or re-record. If you want to create a new song, simultaneously press the [RECORD] button and the [TOP] button.

3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display.

A

E

D

C

B

2 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.

4 Using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons, select the 1 -16 tab for recording melodies and other parts, or select the CHD (Chord) tab for recording chords, and after selecting the 1-16 tab, select a record channel with the [F] (CH) button.

F

J

I

BACK NEXT

H

G

5 Call up the Step Record display by pressing the [G] button.

F

J

I

H

G

Any voice, effect and other settings you make in the Mixing Console are automat- ically cancelled when you call up the CHD (Chord) page.

The voices in the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can- not be selected for Step recording. You can select voices from the PRESET page; however, these may sound slightly different from the original voice.

CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

Measure/Beat/Clock

Velocity The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values.

Gate Time The following settings are available:

Normal ....................... 80% Tenuto ........................ 99% Staccato...................... 40% Staccatissimo .............. 20% Manual ....................... The gate time (note length) can be specied as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Kbd. Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp Actual playing strength

127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Moves the cursor position up and down.

Returns the cursor to the beginning of the song (the rst note of the rst measure).

Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered (only when recording the melody). For information on velocity settings, see below.

Determines the length of the note (as a percentage) from the position at which it is to be entered. (This is available only when recording the melody.) For information on gate time settings, see below.

Each press of this button toggles among the three basic note selectors at the bottom of the display: normal, dotted, and triplet. (This is available only when recording the melody.)

Deletes the event at the cursor.

Use these to move the selected event, in units of measures (BAR), beat, and clocks. For information on measure/beat/clock settings, see below.

Species the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth notes are available only when recording the melody.) This also determines the position to which the pointer will advance after a note has been entered.

6 First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, rst specify the length and loudness in this display, then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard.

To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 45).END

Measure

Beat Clock

1

1

000- 1919

2

000- 1919

3

000- 1919

4

000- 1919

2

1

000- 1919

2

000- 1919

3

000- 1919

4

000- 1919

99CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

100

Recording Melodies Step Record (Note) In this section, well show you how to use Step Recording by guiding you through this actual music example, shown at right. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 99.

Play back the newly created melody Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 107).

1

1-1 Select this note. 1-3 ...press this (to input a tie).

1-2 While holding down this note...

2 2-2

2-3

2-4

2-1 Select this note.

3 3-1 Press this button to display the dotted notes.

3-2 Select this note.

3-3

4 4-1 Call up the normal notes by pressing this button.

4-3

4-2 Select this note.

The notation display on the instrument may not be accurate, especially for tied notes or longer notes. To have the notation dis- played accurately, set the gate time to tenuto by using the [H] button, and input the notes as desired.

To input rests, simply specify the position for the next note (using the [BAR], [BEAT], and [CLOCK] buttons) and input the note. Any "empty" interval between two successive notes is automatically registered as a rest.

CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment Step Record (Chord) The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with precise timing. Since the changes dont have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord changes over which you can record the melody in normal fashion. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 99.

Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below. Enter the chords by using

the currently selected chord ngering method in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

C F G F G7 C

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

1 Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right.

C F G

MAIN A

MAIN

C

F

G Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right.

001:1:000

001:3:000

002:1:000

C F G F G7

MAIN A BREAK

BREAK INTRO

F

G7

002:3:000

002:4:000

2 Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right.

Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right.

101CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

102

Play back the newly created chord progression Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display (page 108). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data.

3 Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right.

C F G F G7 C

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

MAIN

C 003:1:000

Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right.

To enter a ll-in, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button and press one of the MAIN [A] [D] buttons.

END Mark An END mark is shown in the display, indicating the end of the song data. The actual position of the End mark differs depending on the section that is input at the end of the song. When an Ending section is input, the End mark automatically follows the Ending data. When a section other than Ending is input, the End mark is set two measures after the nal section. The End mark can be freely set to any position desired.

CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording. To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation steps 13 on page 98.

About Punch In/Out This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specic section of an already recorded channel. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out Rec Mode

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Determines the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording starts (when PUNCH IN AT is selected).

These settings determine how recording will start.

Normal Overwrite recording starts when you press the SONG [START/STOP] button or when you play the keyboard with Synchro standby set to ON.

First Key On Overwrite recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This setting also preserves the previous lead-in data, letting you record over the original lead-in without erasing it.

Punch In At The song plays back normally up to the indicated Punch In measure (set by the [3] buttons), then starts overwrite recording at that Punch In measure.

These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data.

Determines the Punch Out measure the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording stops (when PUNCH OUT AT is selected).

When this is set to ON, you can use the sostenuto (center) pedal to control the punch-in and punch-out points. Press and hold down the sostenuto pedal to record. Recording stops when you release the pedal.

Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data.

When the Pedal Punch In/ Out function is set to ON, the current function assignment of the sostenuto pedal is cancelled.

Replace All This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped.

Punch Out This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped.

Punch Out At Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6] buttons), then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8REC START setting REC END setting

1 2 3 4 5

Deleted

Deleted

Deleted

Start/start overwrite recording

Original data

Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data

NORMAL REPLACE ALL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NORMAL PUNCH OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006

1 2 3 4 5

Start/ play back original data

Start/ play back original data

Start/ play back original data

Start/ play back original data

Start/ play back original data

Start/ play back original data

Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording

Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording

Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Stop overwrite recording/ play original data

Stop overwrite recording/ play original data

Stop overwrite recording/ play original data

FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006

1 2 3 4 5

PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT

1 2 3 4 5 7

PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006

*1 When measures 1 - 2 are not overwritten, recording starts from measure 3.

*2 Youll have to press the [REC] button at the end of 5 measures.

*1

Start/start overwrite recording *1

Start/start overwrite recording *1

*2

Stop recording *2

Stop recording *2

Stop recording *2

Stop recording *2

Stop recording *2

103CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

104

Whether youve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing features to change the song data.

Editing Channel-related Parameters Channel Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 98. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons.

Quantize Quantize lets you clean up or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.

Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specied note value (see below).

About Quantize Size Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4 note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.

Editing a Recorded Song

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Use this to select the desired edit operation.

Selects the desired channel to be quantized.

Selects the quantize size (resolution). See the below for the details.

Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specied quantization beats only by the specied amount. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the human feel in the recording.

Executes the Quantize operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if youre not satised with the Quantize results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data.

One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization

1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note + 1/8 note triplet *

1/4 note

1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet *

1/16 note + 1/16 note triplet *

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight 1/8 notes completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

Quantize Size

CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

Delete This lets you delete recorded data in the specied channel.

Mix This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Use these to select the desired edit operation.

Deletes all data in the selected channel. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data.

These select the channel to be deleted.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Use these to select the desired edit operation.

Executes the Mix operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if youre not satised with the Mix results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data.

These let you specify the two source channels to be mixed.

If COPY is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the Destination channel.

Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed.

All data other than the mixed note data is derived from the Source 1 channel.

105CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

106

Channel Transpose This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments.

Set Up You can change the initial settings of the song such as voice, level, and tempo to the current settings of the mixing console or panel controls.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Executes the Channel Transpose operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if youre not satised with the Channel Transpose results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data.

Determines the amount of transpose for each channel.

Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16.

To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button.

Use these to select the desired edit operation.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Use these to select the desired edit operation.

Executes the SET UP operation. Once SET UP has been executed, the operation cannot be cancelled or undone.

Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data.

Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception of KEYBOARD VOICE, can be recorded only at the beginning of the song. Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button, and stop playback.

Song.............................Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. Keyboard Voice ...........This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left)

when playing back the song. Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE) button.

Lyrics Bkgd/Lng..........Stores the settings of the Lyrics display. Score Setting ..............Stores the settings of the Score display. Mic. Setting..................Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console. Guide Setting ..............Stores the settings of the practice functions. When the settings are stored, selecting a song

automatically turns on the Guide functions.

Use this to checkmark the selected item. Checkmarked items are stored with the song.

CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

Editing Note Events 1 - 16 From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 98. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.

Note Events Parameter Description Note Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note.

Ctrl (Control change) Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

Prog (Program change) Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to the separate Data List booklet (Voice List).

P.Bnd (Pitch bend) Determines the pitch bend value. A.T. (After touch) Determines the after touch value.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Use these to move the cursor up/down and select the desired event.

Determines the channel to be edited.

For coarse adjustment of the event value.

Calls up the Step Recording display (page 99).

Calls up the Filter display (page 109), letting you select only the events you wish to shown in the Event List.

Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data.

Holding this button down while using the [A] and [B] buttons lets you select multiple events.

For ne adjustment of the event value.

Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events are copied and can be pasted to another location.

Adds a new event to the Event List.

Copies all selected events. The copied events can be pasted to another location.

Deletes the event at the cursor position.

Pastes all cut or copied events to the selected location.

If the value at the cursor has been changed, pressing this restores the original value.

Determines the current position of the event being edited.

Returns to the beginning position of the current song (the rst note of the rst measure).

Use these to move the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the highlighted event. Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from the just- edited value automatically enters that value.

To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] but- ton.

The sound of the voices recorded with Step recording may sound slightly different from the original.

107CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

108

Editing Chord Events CHD From this display, you can edit the chord events youve recorded to the song. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 98. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 107).

Chord Events

Editing System Events SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) From this display, you can edit recorded System events. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 98. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 107).

System Events

Parameter Description Style (Accompaniment style)

Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select the desired style.

Tempo Determines the tempo value. Chord Species the chord its root note, chord type, and on-bass note. Sect (Section) Species the section its name and variation. OnOff (Channel on/off) Determines whether specic channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off. CH.Vol (Channel volume) Determines the level of specic channels (rhythm, bass, etc.). S.Vol (Style volume) Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style.

Parameter Description ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the

music notation. Only one value can be specied at the beginning of the song data. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature. Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting. XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the

separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;

however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;

however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

H

G

Press this to convert the recorded chord and section entries into song data.

To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] but- ton.

CVP-900

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator

Inputting and Editing Lyrics This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 98. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 107). In the following example, well rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, Twinkle Twinkle Little Star. Select the internal song Twinkle Twinkle Little Star. The method for selection is the same as described on page 75.

Lyrics Events

Customizing the Event List Filter This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To lter out an event so that it is not shown on the list, remove the checkmark so that the box is empty. To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or LYRICS (page 107 - page 109).

Parameter Description Name (Song name) Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name. Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics. Code (Other controls) CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

1 Move the cursor to the event containing the lyric star.

3 Use these buttons to call up the Lyric display, from which you can input lyrics. From the Lyric display (page 46), enter the new word, (your name).

4 Press this button to save the newly changed lyric data.

2 Move the cursor to the word star.

To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

The song Twinkle Twinkle Little Star is in the folder For Children in the Song Book (page 75).

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

END EXIT

Calls up the Main Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

Enters checkmarks for all items.

Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously un- checked and vice versa.

Calls up the Control Change Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

When MAIN FILTER or ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When CONTROL CHANGE FILTER is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time.

Selects the item, scrolling up/ down one item at a time.

Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected item.

Selects only note data; checkmarks for all other boxes are removed.

Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button.

109CVP-900

110

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment just as with the preset styles.

About Creating Accompaniment Styles The chart at right shows the basic parts (or channels) that make up each section of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create.

Realtime Recording (page 112) You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the keyboard in real time. However, you dont have to record every part yourself you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your own custom style.

Realtime Recording Characteristics Loop recording

Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a loop, you can also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded.

Overdub recording This feature lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specically delete it yourself. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new material while hearing the previous parts.

Step Recording (page 113) This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difcult to play.

Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 114) This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you could take rhythm patterns from the 8 Beat 1 style, use the bass pattern from 8 Beat 2, and import the chord patterns from the 60s 8 Beat style combining the various elements to create one accompaniment style.

Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 115) With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles youve created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILLIN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING / rit. SYNC.STOP SYNC.START START / STOP

A B C D

DIGITAL RECORDING

Section Channel

INTRO A - D

RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2

MAIN A - D

FILL IN A - D

BREAK

ENDING A - D

For information on the part structure of accompaniment styles, see page 96.

Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2

8Beat 1

Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2

8Beat 2

Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2

60s 8 Beat

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamahas auto accompaniment know-how into a single unied format. By using the edit functions, you can take full advantage of the SFF format and freely create your own styles. The chart at right indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm channels.)The basic or source pattern in the chart is the original style data. This source pattern is recorded using accompaniment style recording (see below). As shown in the chart at right, the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter settings and chord changes (played in Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard) entered to this source pattern.

Source Pattern

1 Source Root (root note of basic chord) 2 Source Chord (type of basic chord)

Pitch Conversion

3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) 4 NTT (Note Transposition Table)

Other Settings

5 High Key (threshold of the pitch conversion)

6 Note Limit (soundable range) 7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of

the chord change)

Output

These are the patterns recorded to the accompaniment styles (page 118).

This data is created by chords played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (page 63).

These settings are edited from the PARAMETER display. These parameters determine how the pitch of the source pattern is converted when you play chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (page 118).

Chord changes (in Auto Accompa- niment section of the keyboard)

Operation

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

BACK NEXT

H

G

DIGITAL STUDIO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

1 Select the desired accompaniment style for editing. To record a new accompaniment style from scratch, call up the BASIC page in the Style Creator display and select New Style by pressing the [C] button.

2

4 Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page.

Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to select the various pages.

3

Press the [EXIT] button to close the STYLE CREATOR display.END

5 Call up the Style display by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (in Assembly page: [J] button), then save the recorded / edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page.

111CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

112

You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style either from scratch or based on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 111.

Realtime Recording Basic

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

H

G

REC.....Channel is enabled for recording. ON.......Channel is enabled for playback. OFF .....Channel is muted.

Selects an empty style, allowing you to create a new style from scratch.

Calls up the display for changing the tempo or beat (time signature).

To release or cancel the selection, press the [1] - [8] button corresponding to the channel you wish to cancel. As long as you continue to hold down the [J] button, you can toggle between deleting and restoring the selected data. Releasing the [J] button permanently deletes the data. Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel.

Available only when the channel is set to [RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete specic percussion sounds during recording. Simultaneously hold down this button and press the key corresponding to the instrument you want to delete.

2 First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/ STOP] button. The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the percussion instruments assigned to the keys.

3 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again.

4 With the REC CHANNEL display shown, close the display by pressing the [EXIT] button.

If youve enabled Sync Start (by pressing the SYNC. START button), you can start recording by simply pressing a key on the key- board.

1 Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate [1] - [8] button. Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box Other Parameters in the BASIC Display on page 113) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.

Any voice can be selected for the RHY1 channel, with the exception of Organ Flutes.

Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected for the RHY 2 channel.

For the non-rhythm chan- nels (BASS - PHR 2), all voices with the exception of the Organ Flutes voice/ Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected.

When this button is pressed, DELETE will appear over channels containing data. To delete data from a specic channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press the appropriate [1] - [8] button.

CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 111.

The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 98), with the exception of the points described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 107).

In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically xed according to the selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen.

When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change, etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.). Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 112) beforehand.

Other Parameters in the BASIC Display [I] (SAVE) button

Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data. [3][4] (Section) buttons

Determines the section to be recorded. [5][6] (Pattern Length) buttons

Determines the length of the selected sections pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill In/Break section is xed at a length of one measure.

[D] (Execute) button Executes the Pattern Length change.

Recording Precautions The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord. All

chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of CM7), keep the following points in mind: * When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the recommended

notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)

* When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)

The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the section Making Style File Format Settings Parameter on page 118. When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord

progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to ROOT TRANSPOSE and NTT to HARMONIC MINOR or MELODIC MINOR (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) meaning that the accompaniment pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts.

You can also select the desired section for recording by press- ing the appropriate panel but- ton. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display, from which you can change sections by using the [6]/[7] but- tons. To actually enter the change, press the [8] button. To select the Fill In section, press the [AUTO FILL IN] but- ton.

C R C C R C

C = chord note C, R = recommended note

Step Recording

F

J

I

H

G

113CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

114

This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 111.

Assembling an Accompaniment Style Assembly

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

2 Selects the style section and channel that will be copied to the corresponding channels, selected with the [A]-[D] and [F]-[I] buttons above.

Determines the playback setting for each channel. You can assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and channel that will be copied are playing. SOLO ........... Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM

channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display (page 112) are played back simultaneously.

ON ............... Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 112) are played back simultaneously.

OFF .............. Mutes the selected channel. If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 112), OFF does not appear and is not available.

1 These let you select the accompaniment style that will be used for each channel of your original style. Select the desired channel by pressing the [A] [D], [F] [I] buttons and press the same button to call up the Style screen, from which you can select the accompaniment style.

3 After repeating steps 1 and 2 as desired, press the [J] (SAVE) button to save the assembled style data. From here, you can store the settings of all channels (RHYTHM1, RHYTHM2, BASS, etc.) to a single accompaniment style.

If you change the section and channel in steps #1 and #2, the currently specied section and channel are also changed. The channels being recorded are also changed and record- ing is stopped automatically.

The PLAY TYPE parameter affects only the playback, and does not change the actual accompaniment style data.

CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

Change the Rhythmic Feel Groove and Dynamics These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 111.

Groove

Groove parameters

Original Beat Species the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if 8 Beat is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if 12 Beat is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (specied in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to 8 Beat and BEAT CONVERTER is set to 12, all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The 16A and 16B Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to 12 Beat are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

Swing Produces a swing feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specied ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8 Beat, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings A through E produce different degrees of swing, with A being the most subtle and E being the most pronounced.

Fine Selects a variety of Groove templates to be applied to the selected section. The PUSH settings cause certain beats to be played early, while HEAVY settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specied beat but not including the rst beat will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if 3 is selected). In all cases, A types produce minimum effect, B types produce medium effect, and C types produce maximum effect.

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Use these to select the desired edit operation.

Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data.

Executes the Groove operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if youre not satised with the Groove results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

Determines the settings for each of the Groove parameters (see the list below).

115CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

116

Dynamics

Dynamics parameters

Accent Type Selects the type of accent.

Strength Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The

higher the value, the stronger the effect.

Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity value 64. Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it.

Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Use these to select the desired edit operation.

Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data.

Executes the Dynamics operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if youre not satised with the Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

Determines the settings for each of the Dynamics parameters (see the list below).

Select the desired channel to which Dynamics is to be applied.

Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard. The more strongly you play the keyboard, the higher the velocity value and, hence, the louder the sound.

CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

Editing the Channel Data In this display, there are ve different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 111.

Quantize Refer to page 104.

Velocity Change Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specied channel (selected with the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons), according to the specied percentage (selected with the [4]/[5] (BOOST/CUT) buttons).

Bar Copy This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specied channel. Use the [4] (TOP) and [5] (LAST) buttons to specify the rst and last measures in the region to be copied. Use the [6] (DEST) button to specify the rst measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied.

Bar Clear This function clears all data from the specied range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4] (TOP) and [5] (LAST) buttons to specify the rst and last measures in the region to be cleared.

Remove Event This function lets you remove specic events from the selected channel. Use the [4] - [6] (EVENT) buttons to select the desired event type to be removed.

See the explanations below.

Preset channel BASS - PHRASE2 can not be edited.

117CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

118

Making Style File Format Settings Parameter This display provides a variety of style controls such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the parameters, refer to Style File Format on page 111. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 111.

Source Root/Chord These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of C and a Source Type ofM7), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 113.

NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table) NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available.

Root Trans (Root Transpose) When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines.

Root Fixed The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.

When NTR is set to Root Fixed and NTT is set to Bypass, the Source Root and Source Chord parameters are changed to Play Root and Play Chord, respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the result- ing sound for all channels.

See the explanations below.

C R C C R C R C C RC C R C C CR C R C C CR

C

C C C C R C C C C CR C C C C RC

C R C

R C R

C R CR

C

C R C CR

C

C CR

C C

C R

R RC C C

C C R C

C

C C R C

C C

C R CC

C C

C R C CR

C

C C R C C

C

C R

C C R

C R R RC

C C R

C C C

C

C CC

C

C R C

C C

C C C C

C

C R C C R

C C

C R C C C

C

C C C

C C

C C CR

R C C

C C C

RC C

C R C CRR

C

C R C

R C C

C C C C C R CC C C R C R

CMaj

Cm

C7

CM7 CM79 C69

Caug Cm6 Cm7 Cm75 Cm79

Cm711 CmM7 CmM79 Cdim Cdim7

C79 C713 C79

Csus4 Csus2C1+8 C1+5

C7 5

C6

Cm9

CM711

C711 C79

C7augCM7aug

C7sus4

C9

C713

When the Source Root is C:

C = chord note C, R = recommended

note

CVP-900

Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator

NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available.

Bypass No transposition. Melody Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Chord Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. Bass Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes on- bass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS ngering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines. Melodic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Harmonic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and atted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed.

High Key/Note Limit High Key

This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the octave just below the highest key. This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (page 118) is set to Root Trans.

Note Limit This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sound). The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range.

RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes.

Stop The notes stop sounding. Pitch Shift The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. Pitch Shift to Root The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. Retrigger The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. Retrigger To Root The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same.

CM

C3-E3-G3

FM

F3-A3-C4

FM F2-A2-C3

CM C3-F3-G3

Example When the highest key is F Root changes

Notes played

CM

E3-G3-C4

FM

High Limit

Low Limit

F3-A3-C4

CM F3-G3-C4

Example When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4

Root changes

Notes played

119CVP-900

120

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

Mixing Console Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound.

You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button (page 62).

About the parameters VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 121)

This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto Revoice feature which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 160) with the rich and dynamic voices that are exclusive to the CVP-900. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your song playback.

FILTER (page 122) These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound.

TUNE (page 122) These give you various tuning controls.

EFFECT (page 123) These control the amount of effect applied to the sound.

EQ (page 125) Determines the overall tone quality of the instrument, letting you adjust the sound to match the particular performance space. Also you can adjust the volume or tone quality for each part.

Mixing Console This set of controls lets you adjust the balance of the voices and their stereo posi- tion, as well as the amount of effect that is applied to each voice.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

Operation

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

1

PANEL PART Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/ Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song, microphone input. STYLE PART Accompaniment parts SONG CH 1 - 8 Channels 1 - 8 of song playback SONG CH 9 -16 Channels 9 - 16 of song playback

2 Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters. For information on the various parameters and settings and how to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 121.

From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the button switches among the displays listed below.

You can quickly and easily set all parts to the same value for the same parame- ter (except for the VOICE parameter). Simulta- neously hold down the [A] - [J] button that corresponds to the parameter you want to change and use the [1] - [8] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial to change the value.

n For details on parameters related to the Sound Cre- ator, see page 89.

Close the Mixing Console display by pressing the [EXIT] button.

END

CVP-900

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 120.

Setting the Level Balance and Voice Volume/Voice

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G

Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special voices of the CVP-900. To use the normal XG voice set, turn this off.

These let you select the voice of each part, and adjust the panpot and volume. VOICE Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 55). When the Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected. PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right. VOLUME Determines the level of each channel, giving you ne control over the balance of all the parts.

Selects the XG voices to be replaced (voices usually used when playing back).

Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices (when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON).

Executes the settings and closes the Auto Revoice Setup display.

Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without executing the settings.

1

2

Each press of this button switches among the various parts/ channels.

Use these to select the VOICE, PANPOT, or VOLUME parameter rows.

Allows you to select the specic voice to be replaced.

PIANO, BASIC and DRUM can be called up simulta- neously.

ALL REVOICE Replaces all of the replaceable XG voices with the rich and authentic voices of the CVP-900.

PIANO REVOICE Replaces only the piano voices.

BASIC REVOICE Replaces only the recommended voices that are suitable for playing back the song.

ALL NO REVOICE All the voices are returned to the original XG voices.

When changing the rhythm/ percussion voices (drum kits, etc.) of the accompani- ment style and song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the begin- ning of the song and playing back from that point. In the case of accompaniment style play, you can restore the original sound by select- ing the same style again.

Keep in mind that using the Revoice function may result in unnatural or unexpected sound, depending on the particular song data.

DRUM REVOICE Replaces only the drum revoices.

The [RHY1] channel in the STYLE PART display can be assigned to any voice except for the Organ Flute voice.

n When playing GM song data, channel 10 (in the SONG CH 9 - 16 page) can only be used for a Drum Kit voice.

121CVP-900

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console

122

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 120.

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 120.

PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 59, 90), this determines the Portamento time. The higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).

PITCH BEND RANGE ...........When the Pitch Bend or Glide effect is assigned to the pedal, this determines the range of the pitch change in semitones.

OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument.

Changing the Tone of the Voice Filter

For details about the Filter, see page 91.

n When a Natural voice is selected, Harmonic and Brightness cannot be changed.

n Be careful with these con- trols. Depending on the selected voice, extreme set- tings may result in noise or distortion.

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters.

HARMONIC ........ Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (see Harmonic Content on page 91).

BRIGHTNESS .... Determines the brightness of the sound by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 91).

Each press of this button switches among the various parts/ channels.

Changing Pitch-related Settings Tune

Portamento is used to cre- ate a smooth transition in pitch from one note to the next.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING.

These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units. MASTER ...Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback. SONG........Transposes the pitch of the song playback. KBD ..........Transposes the pitch of the keyboard.

Refer to the explanation below.

When a Natural voice is selected, Portamento Time cannot be changed.

CVP-900

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 120.

Adjusting the Effects

There are three effect sec- tions: Reverb, Chorus, and DSP (which contains a vari- ety of effect types). These are available independently for the Natural voices and Regular voices. For details, refer to the Effect Block list (page 124).

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Switches among the effect sections: REVERB, CHORUS, and DSP.

Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 124.

Press this to edit and store the effect (page 123, 124).

These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect. BLOCK ........... Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects). PART ............... Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only

when BLOCK is set to DSP1, PARAMETER is set to CONNECTION, and VALUE is set to Insertion or when BLOCK is set to DSP 3-7.

CATEGORY .... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This parameter may not be available depending on the selected block.

TYPE ............... Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block.

When the BLOCK parameter is set to REVERB1, CHORUS1, or DSP 3-7, press this to call up the display from which you can change the detailed settings for the effects.

1

2

Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels.

Indicates the type name for each effect block. When a Natural voice is selected, the type names are indicated above the relevant knobs in the display.

Indicates the type name for each part. When a Natural voice is selected, the effect block names are indicated.

123CVP-900

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console

124

Effect Block

Block Parts Characteristics Number of User Effect

REVERB 1 (for Regular Voices) All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club.

3

REVERB 2 (for Natural Voices) All parts except microphone (MIC)

CHORUS 1 (for Regular Voices) All parts Produces a rich fat sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously.

3

CHORUS 2 (for Natural Voices) All parts except microphone (MIC)

DSP 1 (for Regular Voices) Song (Ch. 1 - 16), Style In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this section features a variety of special effects, including distortion.

3

DSP 2 (for Natural Voices) All parts except microphone (MIC)

DSP 3-6 (for Regular Voices) Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1-16) 10

DSP 7 MIC This lets you apply various effects to your own voice, via the connected microphone.

10

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

A

E

D

C

B

Determines the effect block.

Calls up the display for storing the effect.

Determines the effect category.

Determines the effect type. Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted.

Determines the level of the effect (return level). This is not available when BLOCK is set to DSP1, PARAMETER is set to CONNECTION, and VALUE is set to Insertion or when BLOCK is set to DSP 3-7.

Determines the value of the selected parameter.

Calls up the display for naming the User Effect (page 46).

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

3

4

Select the destination to which the effect is to be stored. The number of memory spaces available for the destination differs for each block (refer to the chart below).

Stores the effect settings you made above to a User Effect location (SYSTEM) for future recall. To call up the effect, select USER from the CATEGORY parameter and select the desired effect from the TYPE parameter.

Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect param- eters while playing the instrument.

This parameter cannot be set when BLOCK is set to REVERB2, CHORUS2, or DSP2 (or BRIL- LIANCE.

Switches between the upper/lower parameters. For the lower parameter, the depth can be changed when the [VARIATION] button is on.

CVP-900

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band. The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance space, or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing on stages or in large studio spaces where the sound is too boomy, or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively dead and free of echoes. The CVP-900 possesses a high grade ve-band digital equalizer function. With this function, a nal effecttone controlcan be added to the output of your instrument. The explanations here apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 120.

Adjusting the Sound to Match the Performance Environment EQ

F

J

I

H

G

A

E

D

C

B

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

DIGITAL STUDIO

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

A

E

D

C

B

Gain

Q

FREQ

Select this to call up the MASTER EQ display. Use the [1] - [8] buttons to adjust the EQ High parameters (amount of gain of the high frequency) for each part.

Use the [1] - [8] buttons to adjust the EQ High parameters (amount of gain of the low frequency) for each part.

Use the [1] - [8] buttons to adjust the EQ Low parameters (amount of gain of the low frequency) for each part.

Selects a Master EQ type.

Select a MASTER EQ type.

Whenever an EQ band is edited, the corresponding EQ value is highlighted and the number of the edited band appears above the Q and FREQ controls. The Q and FREQ controls can then be used to adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the selected band. The higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth. The available FREQ range is different for each band.

The PRESET and USER curves can be edited as required via the corresponding buttons. Each of the ve bands can be boosted or cut by up to 12 dB.

Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ bands simultaneously.

This lets you store your edited PRESET or USER curve to USER 1 or USER 2.

Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels.

125CVP-900

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console

126

Effect Structure

The CVP-900 features the following digital effect systems, which can be applied independently for the Natural voices (page 89) and the Regular voices (page 89). The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set with the panel controls.

About the Effect Connections System and Insertion All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specic part. Reverb, Chorus and DSP 2 are System effects, and DSP 3 - 7 are Insertion effects. The DSP 1 effect, on the other hand, can be congured for either System or Insertion routing.

The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal ow for the send/return controls set on the CVP-900.

For Regular Voices

OUT

Rev SendMAIN VOICE Dry

Cho Send

Unused DSP blocks are automatically assigned to the active parts.

Rev SendLAYER VOICE Dry

Cho Send

Rev SendLEFT VOICE Dry

Cho Send

CHORUS1 Master EQ

REVERB1

DRY LINE

Rev SendMIC Dry

Cho Send

Rev Send STYLE (each channel)

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send DSP1

DSP1

MIC. Effect

Vocal Harmony

When DSP is set as an Insertion effect (here PART is set to one of the STYLE channels), it is put here

in the signal flow.

Noise Gate

3 Band EQ

Compressor

DSP3

DSP4

DSP5

Rev Send SONG (each channel)

Dry

Cho Send

DSP6

DSP7

When DSP is set as a System effect, it is put here in the signal flow.

CVP-900

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console

For Natural Voices

OUT

Rev SendMAIN VOICE Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev SendLAYER VOICE Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev SendLEFT VOICE Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev SendMIC Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

CHORUS 2 BRILLIANCE

REVERB 2

DRY LINE

DSP2

STYLE/SONG (each channel)

127CVP-900

128

Using a Microphone MIC. This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice-processing technology to automatically produce vocal harmony based on a single lead vocal. Four distinct harmony modes as well as an extensive selection of preset harmony types are provided. In addition to straightforward harmony, the CVP-900 also lets you change the apparent gender of the harmony and/or lead vocal sound. For example, if you are a male singer, you can have the CVP-900 automatically generate a two-part female backup. A comprehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and exible control over the vocal harmony sound.

Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type

For details about connecting a microphone, see page 152.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting (page 152).

If you connect a microphone to the CVP-900, you can sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have vocal harmony parts added automatically.

This convenient function lets you temporarily cancel the vocal harmony or other microphone effects when using a connected microphone. This is especially useful when you talk between songs during a performance.

Determines the on/off setting of the effect applied to the microphone, set in the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 123).

This calls up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE display (see below) and lets you set the desired harmony type.

This calls up the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 130) and lets you adjust the level of the microphone and vocal harmony effect.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

Select a Vocal Harmony type.1 Press the [VH

TYPE SELECT] button.

2

This lets you adjust the amount of harmony effect that is applied.

CVP-900

Using a Microphone MIC.

Vocal Harmony Parameter List

Chordal Type/Vocoder Type Determines how the harmony notes are applied.

Harmony Gender Type Can be set to Off or Auto. When Auto, the gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically.

Lead Gender Type Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound (i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be changed. When Off no gender change occurs. When Unison, Male or Female is selected the corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. (In this case the number of harmony notes which can be produced in addition to the lead vocal is reduced to one.)

Lead Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change produced when one of the Lead Gender Types (above) is selected.

Lead Pitch Correction When Correct is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps. This parameter is only effective when one of the Lead Gender Types is selected.

Auto Upper Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specied number of semitones above the lead vocal pitch.

Auto Lower Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specied number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch.

Upper Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the Auto Upper Gender Threshold.

Lower Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the Auto Lower Gender Threshold.

Vibrato Depth Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also affects the lead vocal sound if a Lead Gender Type is selected.

Vibrato Rate Sets the speed of the vibrato effect.

Vibrato Delay Species the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced.

Harmony 1/2/3 Volume Sets the volume of the rst, second, or third harmony note, respectively. Harmony notes 1 - 3 are assigned in order of ascending pitch (1 is the lowest pitch, 3 is the highest).

Harmony 1/2/3 Pan Species the stereo (pan) position of the rst, second, or third harmony note, respectively. Harmony notes 1 - 3 are assigned in order of ascending pitch (1 is the lowest pitch, 3 is the highest). When Random is selected the stereo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played.

Harmony 1/2/3 Detune Detunes the rst, second, or third harmony note respectively by the specied number of cents. Harmony notes 1 - 3 are assigned in order of ascending pitch (1 is the lowest pitch, 3 is the highest).

Pitch to Note When ON the lead vocal sound plays the CVP-900 tone generator system. (However, dynamic changes in the vocal sound do not affect the volume of the tone generator.)

Pitch to Note Part Determines which of the CVP-900 parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is ON.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

Save the changed data (page 39, 45).

The saved settings can be named (page 42) or deleted (page 44) in the USER page.

3

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

Select a Vocal Harmony type.

Select a Vocal Harmony parameter (see below).

Adjust the parameter value.

Return to the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE display.

END

129CVP-900

Using a Microphone MIC.

130

Operation

Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects OVERALL SETTING The explanations here apply to step 2 above.

3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER) Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band. The CVP-900 features a high grade three-band digital equalizer function for the microphone sound. Hz .............. Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. dB ............... Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.

NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specied level. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass. SW.............. SW is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Noise Gate on or off. TH. ............. TH. is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.

Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone MICROPHONE SETTING

F

G

H

I

J

A

B

C

D

E

BACK NEXT

1 Press the [MIC. SETTING] button.

2 Select the MICROPHONE SETTING page by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] button and set the parameters. For information on the various parameters and settings and how to use them, refer to the explanations below.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

END

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

F

G

H

I

J

A

B

C

D

E

Select the 3BAND EQ.

Use these to change the value for each function or setting. For details, see below.

Select the NOISE GATE/COMPRESSOR.

Select the VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL/MIC.

CVP-900

Using a Microphone MIC.

COMPRESSOR This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specied level. This is useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics. It effectively compresses the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. SW.............. SW is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Compressor on or off. TH. ............. TH. is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be

applied. RATIO ........ This adjusts the compression ratio. OUT ........... Adjusts the nal output level.

VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled. VOCODER CONTROL The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by note data the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the song data. This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony. SONG CHANNEL

MUTE/PLAY: When set to MUTE, the channel selected below is muted (turned off) during keyboard performance or song playback. OFF: Song data control over harmony is turned off. 1-16: When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer, the note data recorded to the assigned song channel controls the harmony.

KEYBOARD OFF: Keyboard control over harmony is turned off. UPPER: Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony. LOWER: Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.

BALANCE This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. When this is set to L H, only the lead vocal is output.

MODE All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which produce harmony in different ways. The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track, and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice. The three modes are described below.

VOCODER: The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard (Main, Layer and Left) and/ or song data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks. CHORDAL: During accompaniment playback, chords played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control the harmony. During song playback, chords contained in song data control the harmony. (Not available if the song does not contain any chord data.) AUTO: When the auto accompaniment or Left part is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song, the mode is automatically set to CHORDAL. In all other cases, the mode is set to VOCODER.

CHORD The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for chord detection. OFF: Chords are not detected. XF: Chords of XF format are detected. 1-16: Chords are detected from note data in the specied song channel.

MIC (MICROPHONE) The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled. MUTE .............. When set to OFF, the microphone sound is turned off. VOLUME ......... Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound.

131CVP-900

Using a Microphone MIC.

132

Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects TALK SETTING

Determines the settings when the [TALK] button is on. The explanations here apply to step 2 on page 130.

VOLUME/PAN/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR

DSP/TYPE/DEPTH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound.

This determines the volume of the microphone sound.

These set the depth of the reverb and chorus effects applied to the microphone sound.

This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the overall sound (excepting the microphone input) allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

F

G

H

I

J

A

B

C

D

E

This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON or OFF.

This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the microphone sound.

This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound.

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These sophisticated functions let you customize the Clavinova to your own musical needs and preferences.

Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning Master Tune and Scale Tune

Master Tune (page 135) This allows you to make ne adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument letting you accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments.

Scale Tune (page 135) This determines the particular tuning system (or temperament) for the instrument. This is especially useful for playing period pieces, to match the tuning system used during specic musical eras.

Setting Song-related Parameters Song Settings (page 137) These allow you to set parameters related to song playback as well as the practice function types.

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering

Style Setting / Split Point (page 138) These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point.

Chord Fingering (page 139) This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display.

POWER METRONOME

MASTER VOLUME

STYLE

ACMP AUTO FILL IN

OTS LINK

BREAK INTRO MAIN

START STOP

ON

MIN MAX

OFF

ENDING rit.

TAP TEMPO

REW REPEATTOP FFREC

MIC. SIGNAL OVER

FADE IN OUT

TAP TEMPO

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE BALANCE

CHANNEL ON OFF

TRANSPOSETEMPO

SYNC.STOP START STOP

PART

PART

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

DIRECT ACCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXIT

START STOP

SONG

EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1

VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING

STYLE L R

SYNC.START

RESETRESET

GUIDE

MENU

BACK NEXT

VOICE PART

PIANO

ON OFF

HARMONY ECHO LEFT HOLDMONO

DIGITAL STUDIO

H

G LAYER

PIANO & HARPSI. E. PIANO PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS ORGAN FLUTESORGAN & ACCORDION

BRASS WOODWIND CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG USERSTRINGS

LEFT

DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY1

1 432

3 4 75 862

ENTER

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

MUSIC FINDER ONE TOCTH SETTING

REVERB DSP VARIATION

MENU

FUNCTION

Operation

MENU

DEMO

HELP

FUNCTION

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

H

G

2 Select the desired function.1

3 Set the parameters of the selected function. The operations for each function are covered in the following explanations.

To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT] button.

END

133CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

134

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard Controller

Pedal (page 139) These settings determine how the connected pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches) are used. They can be assigned to a variety of functions, letting you control operations with your feet such as turning the accompaniment style on/off, or triggering Fill In patterns.

Keyboard / Panel (page 141) These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the keyboard (how touch affects volume), and let you independently transpose the keyboard, song data, and the entire instrument.

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set

Registration Sequence (page 142) This determines the order in which the Registration Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up by using the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal.

Freeze (page 142) This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.

Voice Set (page 143) This lets you determine whether certain voice-related settings (such as Effects, EQ, Harmony, etc.) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice.

Setting Harmony and Echo (page 143) These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the amount of effect.

Showing the Clavinova Display on a TV Video Out (page 144) These settings determine the contents of the Video Out signal when outputting the CVP-900s display contents to a TV monitor (connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal).

Making MIDI Settings

System (page 145) These determine various system messages settings (such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well as Local Control on/off.

Transmit (page 146) This determines how playback data is sent to connected MIDI devices i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over each channel.

Receive (page 147) This determines how the parts of the CVP-900 respond to data from connected MIDI devices i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be received over each channel.

Root (page 147) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root notes, for use with the auto accompaniment.

Chord Detect (page 147) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the chords, for use with the auto accompaniment.

Other Settings Utility

Cong 1 (page 148) This page contains settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound.

Cong 2 (page 149) From this page, you can adjust the display, make speaker settings, and change the voice number indication.

Disk (page 150) From this page, you can format disks, and copy from disk to disk.

Owner (page 151) From this page, you can set the language of the instrument, and input your own name which is shown automatically every time the power is turned on. Also, you can select a background picture for the MAIN display.

System Reset (page 151) This function restores the CVP-900 to its original factory settings. You can also specify which types of settings are to be restored, as well as store your own original settings for future recall.

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

Tuning the Overall Pitch Master Tune

Selecting a Scale Scale Tune

Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale Master Tune/Scale Tune

Hz (Hertz) This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound, and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second.

n The Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Determines the overall pitch of the CVP-900, from 414.8 - 466.8 Hz. Press the 4 or 5 [] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Determines the Scale (page 136).

Determines the note to be tuned and the amount of tuning. The tuning range is from -64 through 0 to +63. Each increment equals one cent (one cent is one hundredth of a semitone).

Determines the ne tuning of the selected note in 1- cent steps. Press the 5 or 6 [] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting.

Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes.

The current tuning of each note is shown above or below the corresponding key. Cent

A unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone).

n You can register your origi- nal scale tunings to a REG- ISTRATION MEMORY button. To do this, check- mark SCALE in the REG- ISTRATION MEMORY display (page 85).

135CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

136

Scale

Equal Temperament The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today.

Pure Major/Pure Minor These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies such as choirs and acapella singing.

Pythagorean This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads.

Mean-Tone This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more in tune. It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.

Werckmeister/Kirnberger This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord.

Arabic Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C) The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument.

C C

D E E F F

G A A B B

Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2

Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2

Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8

Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7

Arabic1 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0

Arabic2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

Setting Song-related Parameters Song Settings

Quick Start On some commercially avail- able song data, certain set- tings related to the song (such as voice selection, vol- ume, etc.) are recorded to the rst measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to ON, the CVP-900 reads all initial non-note data of the song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the rst note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data.

n Channel Refers to the MIDI channel (page 158). The channels are assigned as follows: Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16

n The guide lamps light in response to song channel assigned to Tracks 1 and 2, as well as chord data (when contained in the song). Nor- mally, you can leave the AUTO SET CH function set to ON, and the song channel will automatically be set. If the results arent satisfac- tory, youll need to match the Channel Setting TRK1 CH and TRK2 CH parameters to the appropriate right- and left-hand parts.

n Phrase Mark This data species a certain location in the song data.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Determines the Guide method.

Turns guide lamps ON or OFF.

Determines the timing for the guide lamps.

JUST ........ The guide lamps light precisely at the moment you should play.

NEXT ........ The guide lamps light just before the moment you should play. If you miss the proper timing, the guide lamps ash.

Turns Quick Start on/off (see note).

Allows you to play back all songs from the same folder continuously.

Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK2] button.

Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK1] button.

When set to ON, this automatically sets the proper Track 1 and Track 2 channels for use with the practice functions. Normally, this should be set to ON.

Determines the language of the displayed lyrics. When this is set to AUTO, the language defaults to that of the song data. When not set to AUTO, the language defaults to Japanese, when the internal setting (page 151) is JAPANESE; for all other languages, this is set to INTERNATIONAL.

Determines whether the Phrase Mark Repeat function for the song is on or off. When this is on, you can repeatedly play back a specied phrase (selection of measures) of the song. The method for specifying a phrase mark is the same as that in the SONG POSITION display (page 77).

Determines the harmony channel for Vocoder (page 131).

137CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

138

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters Style Setting and Split Point

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

These select the part to which the split point setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand range, or both. Press the desired key for the split point while holding down one of these buttons. The pressed key is included in the range for the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT). A+L (ACMP + LEFT)

Allows you to simultaneously set the split point for both the left-hand range and the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to ON, you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords even when the accompaniment style is not playing back.

This applies to the OTS Link function, in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up with changes in the section. This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the section. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.) Real Time One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button. Next Bar One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a section button.

The CVP-900 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 66) simply by quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time.

Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to ON, the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard).

Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped).

Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the left- hand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these buttons by themselves to set the split point value.

About Section Set When any of the Main A-D sections is not included in the accompaniment style data, the nearest section is automatically selected. For example, when Main D is not contained in the selected accompaniment style, Main C will be called up.

L (LEFT) Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard.

A (ACMP) Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

Split point can be set in the MAIN display.

About Split Point Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto Accompaniment section (ACMP) and left-hand section (LEFT) from the right-hand section (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than the LEFT split point.

Split point (A) Split point (L)

Split point (A) + (L)

Auto Accompaniment

section

Auto Accompaniment section + Left-hand section

Left-hand section

Right-hand section

Right-hand section

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

Setting the Fingering Method Chord Fingering This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below).

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

Making Settings for the Pedals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Determines the ngering type (page 63).

This lets you change the root note from the chord.

This lets you change the chord type.

Indicates the note that belongs to a chord in the music.

Indicates the note that belongs to a chord. Some notes can be omitted. The chord name is indicated next to CHORD NAME.

...Required

...Can be omitted

...Either note can be omitted

...Can be omitted when the note indicated by

is omitted

The chord indication in the display applies to the Fin- gered method, regardless if another method is actually selected.

Chord Tutor The Chord Tutor feature is essentially an electronic chord book that shows you appropriate ngerings for chords; it is useful when you want to play certain chords. Simply specify the desired chord via the [6] - [8] buttons, and the ngerings for the Fingered method are indicated in the display.

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard Controller

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Determines the particular pedal to which a function is to be assigned.

Determines the function to be assigned to the selected pedal. Any one of the available functions can be assigned to each pedal. For information on the assignable functions, see Pedal-controllable Functions on page 140.

If necessary, you can turn the corresponding part ON/ OFF or set the control depth (see the next page).

Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal youve connected to the [AUX PEDAL] jack. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation.

139CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

140

Pedal-controllable Functions

* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

The parameters below correspond to buttons [2] - [8], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters HALF PEDAL POINT, MAIN, LAYER and LEFT automatically appear in the display.

* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (AUX pedal only) to control the volume.

SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the rst note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to certain voices PIANO, for example.

GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 122). It does not work for Natural voices.

PITCHBEND* Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed. This can only be set to the AUX pedal and the CVP-900s damper pedal.

MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed. This does not work for the Natural voices.

DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button. This does not work for the Natural voices.

VIBROTOR ON/OFF Turns the VibRotor effect type (page 123) on and off. This only works for the Natural voices.

HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.

VOCAL HARMONY Same as the [VOCAL HARMONY] button.

TALK Same as the [TALK] button.

SCORE PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page (one page only).

SCORE PAGE- While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page (one page only).

SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button.

STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button.

SYNCRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button.

INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button.

MAIN A Same as the MAIN [A] button.

MAIN B Same as the MAIN [B] button.

MAIN C Same as the MAIN [C] button.

MAIN D Same as the MAIN [D] button.

FILL DOWN A ll-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left.

FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing.

BREAK Break starts playing.

FILL UP A ll-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right.

ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button.

FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 63).

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the ngering is set to FULL KEYBOARD, the function does not work.

PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4] - [8] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument.

LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button.

LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button.

OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting.

OTS- Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.

SONG, STYLE, MIC, LEFT, LAYER, MAIN

These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.

HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the right pedal until the damper effect (page 59) starts working. This can be set for certain kinds of pedals, such as the AUX pedal (YAMAHA FC7) or the CVP-900s damper pedal.

DEPTH Determines the depth of the left pedal effect, when SOFT is selected. This only works for the Natural voices.

UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).

RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.

ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed.

OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released.

KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal.

PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal.

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose Keyboard/Panel Keyboard Touch The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to customize the keyboards touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences.

Transpose Assign This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button.

A

E

D

C

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

HARD 2 Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a heavy touch.

HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for higher volume.

NORMAL Standard touch response.

SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate playing strength.

SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch.

Determines the Touch sensitivity setting (refer to the table at right).

Determines the xed volume level when Touch is set to OFF.

Determines whether touch is on or not for the corresponding parts.

The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep in mind that you can set each voice to a different touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can set this so that the voice is not affected by touch (page 90).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

KEYBOARD For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and the accompaniment styles.

SONG For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of the songs.

MASTER For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the entire instrument (keyboard voices, accompaniment styles, and songs).

Transpose Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices, accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units.

1 Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

2 A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE ASSIGN, appears.

3 Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the [EXIT] button.

Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song These settings can be used to match both the song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, lets say you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song. The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at 0, set the Keyboard Transpose to 2, and set Song Transpose to -3. This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data down to your comfortable singing key.

TRANSPOSE

RESET

END

The transpose function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices.

141CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

142

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets Registration Sequence You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play.

Maintaining Panel Settings Freeze This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. For details, see page 87.

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Turns the Registration Sequence function on/off. When this is set to ON, the programmed Registration Sequence is shown at the top right of the Main display, and you can step through the sequence in this display by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedals.

Determines which pedal is used to advance (increment) through the sequence.

Determines which pedal is used to reverse (decrement) through the sequence.

Determines how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence. Stop Pressing the [NEXT] button or the advance pedal has no effect. The sequence is stopped. Top The sequence starts again at the beginning. Next Bank The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory bank in the same folder.

Indicates the le name of the selected Registration Memory bank.

Indicates the Registration Memory preset numbers, in the order of the current Registration Sequence.

These move the cursor position in the sequence.

Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number.

Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory preset immediately before the cursor position.

Deletes the number at the cursor position.

Deletes all Registration Memory numbers in the sequence.

Setting Registration Sequence Enable to ON overrides any other Pedal settings (for pedals assigned to Regist (+) Pedal and Regist (-) Pedal here). These include the pedal set- tings on page 139, and in Voice Set on page 143.

n When both Regist (+) Pedal and Regist (-) Pedal are set to OFF, the pedals cannot be used to step through the Registration Sequence; only the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons can be used in the MAIN display.

n When both Regist (+) Pedal and Regist (-) Pedal are set to the same pedal, Regist (+) Pedal takes priority.

Registration Sequence data is included as part of the Registration Memory bank le. To save your newly pro- grammed Registration Sequence, store the current Registration Memory bank le (page 39, 45). Any Reg- istration Sequence data is lost when changing Regis- tration Memory banks, unless youve stored it with the Registration Memory bank le.

Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button.END

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings Voice Set When changing voices (selecting a voice le), the settings best matching the voice the same as those set in the Sound Creator are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to OFF in this page.

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

A

E

D

C

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Use these to select the desired part.

These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings (Voice selection, Effects, EQ, Harmony/echo, and left pedal assignment) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part.

Normally, these should all be set to ON.

Harmony/echo and Left pedal assignment cannot be set for the Layer and Left parts.

Setting Harmony and Echo

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Determines the Harmony type. For details, see page 144.

Determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value).

Determines the level of the Harmony effect.

Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above.

This lets you assign the Harmony effect to various parts. For details, see page 144.

When this is set to ON, the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that belongs to a chord played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. This parameter is not available when Multi Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above.

143CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

144

About the Harmony Types

When a normal Harmony type (Standard Duet through Strum) is selected

When Multi Assign is selected Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the rst is played by the Main voice and the second by the Layer voice.

When Echo is selected An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.

When Tremolo is selected A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.

When Trill is selected Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo.

About the Harmony Assignments

Multi This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the Main and Layer parts are turned on and the Standard Duet type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice. Main Harmony is applied only to the Main part. Layer Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

Split point

Chords played to the left of the split point control the harmony.

Harmony notes (based on the chord and the selected type) are automatically added to the melody played to the right of the split point.

Showing the Clavinova Display on a TV Video Out

Occasionally some ashing parallel lines may appear in the television or video monitor. This does not necessarily indicate that the monitor is malfunction- ing. You may be able to remedy the situ- ation by changing the Character Color or Background Color parameters. For optimum results, also try adjusting the color settings on the monitor itself.

Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eye- sight. Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain.

Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as recommended here, the monitor you are using may not show the Clavinovas display contents as expected (e.g., the display contents may not t on the screen, the characters may not be completely clear, or the colors may be incorrect).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

VIDEO IN

Television

VIDEO OUT

Set this to correspond to the standard used by your particular television/video equipment: NTSC or PAL.

Determines the contents of the Video Out signal, or which data is sent to the video monitor. Lyrics........Only the lyrics of the song are output via VIDEO OUT, regardless of the display

that is called up on the instrument itself. This lets you select other displays and still have the lyrics shown on the monitor.

LCD ...........The currently selected display is output via VIDEO OUT.

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the USER display, for future recall. For general information and details about MIDI, see What is MIDI? (page 156). The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) System Call up the display as described in step 2 above.

Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to ON, the keyboard of the CVP-900 controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to OFF, the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the CVP-900s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the CVP-900s internal voices, and use the CVP-900 keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.

Setting the MIDI Parameters

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

1 Select the desired template.

2 Call up the Edit display, then select and set the desired functions/parameters. For details about each of the MIDI edit displays, see the following pages.

Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set)

All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer and Left.

Master KBD The Clavinova functions as a master keyboard for controlling external tone generators or other devices.

KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play instead of the individual parts (Main/ Layer/Left).

Song All Transmit channels are set to correspond to the Song channels 1-16. Use this to play the Clavinova song data with an external tone generator, or to record your entire performance to an external sequencer.

Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and Clavinova synchronizes with a external MIDI device.

MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the keyboard voice and accompaniment style with a MIDI accordion.

MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI accordion control the accompaniment style, as well as play the chord and bass parts.

MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal controls the bass note of the accompaniment.

MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal plays the bass part.

MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor received.

3 Call up the User display and press this button to save the newly edited MIDI settings. Up to ten setups can be saved.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.END

The saved settings can be named (page 42) or deleted (page 44) in the User page.

For editing the Local Control parameters.

For editing the Message Switch parameters.

For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop parameters.

145CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

146

Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop

Clock Determines whether the CVP-900 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the CVP-900 is being used alone. If you are using the CVP-900 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the CVP-900 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to EXTERNAL. In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the CVP-900 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.

Transmit Clock Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to OFF, no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is transmitted.

Receive Transpose When this parameter is set to OFF, note data received by the CVP-900 is not transposed, and when it is set to ON, the received note data is transposed according to the current CVP-900 keyboard transpose (page 141) setting.

Start/Stop Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or style playback.

Message Switch SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system

exclusive message data ON or OFF. SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment

ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect root and

type) ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) .......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external

equipment ON or OFF.

Transmitting MIDI Data Transmit

Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display

* Available in RECEIVE display only (page 147).

Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specic note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.

Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data.

Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or patch numbers.

Pitch Bend (PB) See page 140.

After Touch (AT)* With this function, the Clavinova senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.

FA, FC MIDI messages for starting/stop- ping the song or style. The FA message corresponds to start, and FC corresponds to stop.

A

E

D

C

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Determines the channel for changing transmit settings.

Determines the Part for the selected channel.

Turns transmission of the specied data type on or off. See below for details on the data types.

The dots corresponding to each channel (1-16) ash briey whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s).

This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent.

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

Receiving MIDI Data Receive

MIDI Receive Parts

Setting Root Note Channels Root The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to ON are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings.

Setting Chord Channels Chord Detect The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to ON are recognized as the chord notes in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the ngering type. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the ROOT display above.

OFF No MIDI data is received.

SONG Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16 correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively.

MAIN The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

LAYER The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

KEYBOARD MIDI note data received by the Clavinova plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard.

ACMP RHYTHM1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 notes.

ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS notes.

ACMP CHORD1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 notes.

ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD notes.

ACMP PHRASE1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 notes.

EXTRA PART1-5 There are ve parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. When these ve channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator.

A

E

D

C

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Determines the channel for changing receive settings.

Determines the Part for the selected channel. See below for details about the receive parts.

Turns reception of the specied data type on or off. See page 146 for details on the data types.

The dots corresponding to each channel (1 - 32) ash briey whenever any data is received on the channel(s).

The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal (Port A of the CBX driver) correspond to chan- nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO HOST terminal (Port B of the CBX driver) corresponds to channels 17 - 32.

This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received.

A

E

D

C

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Selects the channels in groups of eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25 - 32, respectively.

Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF. Sets all channels to OFF.

The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal (Port A of the CBX driver) correspond to chan- nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO HOST terminal (Port B of the CBX driver) corresponds to channels 17 - 32.

When several channels are simultaneously set to ON, the root note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels.

147CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

148

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap CONFIG 1

Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out.

Metronome These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters.

Other Settings Utility

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).

Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).

Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 - 5.0 seconds).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the level of the metronome sound.

Determines which sound is used for the metronome. Bell Off ........................Conventional metronome sound, with no bell. Bell On.........................Conventional metronome sound, with bell. English Voice ..............Count in English (One, Two, Three, Four) German Voice..............Count in German (Eins, Zwei, Drei, Vier) Japanese Voice ...........Count in Japanese (Ichi, Ni, San, Shi) French Voice ...............Count in French (Un, Deux, Trois, Quatre) Spanish Voice .............Count in Spanish (Uno, Dos, Tres, Cuatro)

Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. When you start the song or accompaniment style, the values matching to them are automatically set.

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

Parameter Lock This function is used to lock the specied parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or song and sequence data.

Tap Count This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 52).

Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System, and Voice Number Indication CONFIG 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Selects the desired parameter for locking/ unlocking.

Determines whether the selected parameter is locked (checkmarked) or unlocked (empty).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Determines the level of the tap sound.

Determines the particular sound used for the Tap Start function. Any drum or percussion sound in the Standard Kit (page 56) can be selected.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8Determines the brightness of the backlit display.

Determines whether or not the voice bank and number are shown in the PRESET page of the VOICE display (page 55). This is useful when you want to check the proper bank select MSB/LSB values and program number to specify when selecting the voice from an external MIDI device.

HEADPHONE SW (SWITCH) Speaker sounds normally, but is cut off when headphones are inserted to the PHONES jack. ON Speaker sound is always on. OFF Speaker sound is off.

Determines the contrast of the display.

149CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

150

Copying and Formatting Disks Disk Copying cannot be done

between a 2DD disk and 2HD disk. When copying, make sure both disk are the same type.

Depending on the amount of data contained in the original source disk, you may have to swap the two disks several times until all of the data is properly copied.

Make sure to read the section Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks on page 6.

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to ON, the Clavinova automatically calls up the rst disk song when a disk is inserted.

This function copies all the data from one disk to another, letting you back up all your important data before editing. For instructions, see Copying from Disk to Disk below.

This function formats a oppy disk (see below).

Source disk

Copy Copy

Destination disk

Internal memory

Copying from Disk to Disk As shown below, rst copy the data of the original (source) disk to the CVP-900, then copy the data to the backup (destination) disk.

1 Press the [F] button. A message appears, prompting you to insert the source disk.

2 Insert the disk containing the original data into the drive and press OK. A Now copying message appears, and the CVP-900 begins copying data to internal memory. To abort the operation, press CANCEL.3 At the Please insert a destination

disk and press the OK button prompt, eject the source disk and replace it with a blank, formatted disk, then press OK. To abort the operation, press CANCEL.

4 When the operation is nished (or when prompted), eject the destination disk.

Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws. Copying commer- cially available data is strictly prohibited, except for your own per- sonal use. Some music software is purposely copy-protected and cannot be copied.

Formatting a Disk When using an unformatted disk for the rst time, make sure to properly format it on the CVP-900. This includes blank disks as well as disks already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the disk.

Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the DISK page above.

The Format operation initial- izes a disk with a specic le system, allowing the corre- sponding device (in this case, the CVP-900) to access it properly. Since there are several types of formats and disks available, you should know which ones to use with the CVP-900. 2DD disks are for- matted to a capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks are for- matted to a capacity of 1.44 MB.

Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk. Make sure that the disk youre formatting does not contain important data!

CAUTION Disk Lamp When the power is turned on, the disk lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used.

CVP-900

Making Global and Other Important Settings Function

Entering Your Name and Language Preference Owner

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the CVP-900 System Reset This operation lets you restore the CVP-900 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI Setup, User Effect, Music Finder, and Files & Folders.

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

Press this button to enter an Owner name(page 17; for instructions on naming see page 46). This name is automatically shown when you turn the power on.

Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language.

Calls up the MAIN PICTURE display, from which you can select the background of the MAIN display.

When selecting background data from a oppy disk: Only bitmap les (.BMP) can be

used for the background of the MAIN display. Make sure to use images no larger than 640 x 480 pixels. Smaller images are automat- ically copied and tiled in the display.

The selected background will not be displayed when the power is turned on again unless the same disk con- taining the data has been inserted into the drive.

The background may take some time to appear. If you want to reduce this time, save the back- ground to the USER page of the MAIN PICTURE display.

n Selecting a different language here- may cause the following problems. Some characters of the lenames

you entered may be garbled. Files may not be accessible. Restoring the original language solves the above problems. Reading the les on the computer with a different language system may cause similar problems to those above.

A

E

D

C

B

F

J

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H

G

These call up the corresponding Open/ Save displays. These let you store the corresponding data as les to disk, for future recall. Pressing each of these buttons calls up the corresponding Open/Save display, from which you can select the corresponding PRESET page. From this PRESET page, you can save the relevant data.

Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. You can also restore only the System Setup settings by simultaneously holding down the highest key on the keyboard (C7) and turning on the power.

Restores the MIDI templates to the original factory settings.

Restores the User Effects (page 124) to the original factory settings.

Restores the Music Finder data to the original factory settings.

Deletes all les and folders stored in the User page.

Executes the Factory Reset operation for all items checkmarked above.

The functions and settings below do not apply to the Fac- tory Reset operation. However, you can restore these to their original settings by calling up the preset System Setup les, using the Open/Save System Files function. Language Owner Name LDC Contrast LCD Brightness Video Out settings (NTSC/PAL) Screen Content

All Music Finder records can be stored together as a single le. When calling up a stored le, a message appears prompting you to replace or append the records as desired. Replace: All Music Finder records cur- rently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected le. Append: The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers.

151CVP-900

152

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

1 Using the Headphones (PHONES jacks).

To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the under- side of the keyboard. You can also determine whether or not the internal stereo speaker system is shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack (page 149). Two people can enjoy listening to the Clavi- nova together by connecting two pairs of headphones to the two jacks.

2 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack).

By connecting a microphone to the Clavinova, you can enjoy singing along with your own performance or song playback. (A dynamic microphone is recommended.) The Clavinova outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the built-in speakers.

1 Connect your microphone to the MIC./LINE IN jack (standard 1/4" phone jack).

2 Set the [MIC. LINE] switch (located next to the [MIC./LINE IN] jack) to the MIC. position.

3 Use the [INPUT VOLUME] knob (located next to the MIC./LINE IN jack) to set the microphone volume. The volume should be set high enough that the SIGNAL lamp on the front panel lights steadily when you sing, but not so high that the OVER lamp lights (page 128).

Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur.

CAUTION

MIN MAX

INPUT MIC. MIC. LINE PHONESVOLUME LINE IN

12

Use an unidirectional microphone for best results.

MIC. LINE MIC. LINE

When connecting a microphone When connecting a guitar

You should set the [MIC. LINE] switch to the LINE position when connecting an audio source with line-level output to the MIC./LINE IN jack.

PC-1 PC-2 MIDIMac

HOST SELECTTO HOSTAUX PEDAL INOUTTHRU

MIDI

L L+R R L L+R R

VIDEO OUT AUX IN AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED) L R

86

5 4 3

7

P.153 P.153P.153

P.154 P.154P.154

CVP-900

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

345 Connecting Audio & Video Devices

You can connect the Clavinova to a wide range of audio equipment by using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks, which are located at the bottom left of the instrument. Connect as shown in the illustrations below using standard audio cables.

3 Playing the sounds of the Clavinova through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks)

4Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in speakers of the Clavinova (AUX IN jacks)

5 Showing the display of the Clavinova on a connected TV monitor (VIDEO OUT) You can connect the Clavinova to a television or video monitor to display the lyrics in your song data or LCD on a larger screen. The particular contents of the display can also be set (page 144).

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance.

When the Clavinova AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, rst turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off.

CAUTION

Never connect the Clavinova AUX OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks, either directly or via external audio equipment. Such connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage the Clavinova.

CAUTION

(LEVEL FIXED) L R

AUX OUT

L L+R R

Audio cable

To powered speaker

RCA pin plug

RCA pin plug AUX IN

Cassette tape recorder stereo system

Phone plug (standard)

When these are connected (with RCA pin plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is output to the external device at a xed level, regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] control setting.

When these are connected (with standard phone plugs), you can use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device.

Clavinova

If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX OUT L/L+R jack.

When the Clavinovas AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, rst turn on the power of the external device, then that of the Clavinova.

CAUTION

AUX IN

L L+R R

Audio cable

LINE OUT

Tone generator

Phone plug (standard)

Clavinova

The Clavinovas [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks.

If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack.

For information on setting the video standard (NTSC or PAL), refer to page 144. The default setting is PAL.

Use an audio-video cable with good high-frequency characteris- tics and RCA-type pin jacks to connect the Clavinova to a televi- sion or video monitor.

AUX PEDAL VIDEO OUT AUX IN

L L+R R

RCA pin plugRCA pin

plug VIDEO IN

Television

153CVP-900

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

154

6 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (AUX PEDAL jack)

By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the FC7) to the AUX PEDAL jack, you can control any one of a variety of important functions with your foot such as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play (page 139).

By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to this jack, you can replicate the function of some panel buttons, doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment.

7 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals)

Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the Clavinova. Make sure to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to MIDI when you use these connectors. For more information about connections, see What You Can Do With MIDI on page 158.

MIDI IN........... Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device

MIDI OUT ....... Sends out MIDI messages generated by the Clavinova

MIDI THRU ..... Simply relays the MIDI messages received at MIDI IN

For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to the following sections: Whats MIDI? (page 156) What You Can Do With MIDI (page 158) MIDI functions (page 145)

8 Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)

Connect your CVP-900 to computer and take advantage of the wide range of powerful and versatile software for creating and editing music. The CVP-900 can be connected in three ways.

Using the TO HOST terminal Using the MIDI terminals Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional

USB interface (UX series)

Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is turned off.

CAUTION

Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters.

Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computers serial port and the Clavinovas TO HOST terminal, you need to install a specied MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows). You can download this driver from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com

Youll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform.

When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, rst turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before con- necting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of the computer rst, then that of the Clavinova.

If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.

When the HOST SELECT switch is set to PC-1, PC-2, or Mac, you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connec- tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI con- nectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI, you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST ter- minal.

CVP-900

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

Using the TO HOST terminal Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS- 232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the CVP-900. For the connection cable, use the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that matches the personal computer type.

IBM-PC/AT (Windows) Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the CVP-900 using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the CVP-900 HOST SELECT switch to the PC-2. (Data transfer rate is 38,400 bps.)

Macintosh Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the CVP-900 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the CVP-900 HOST SELECT switch to the MAC (Data transfer rate is 31,250 bps).

Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owners manual for the particular software you are using.

Using the MIDI terminals When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the CVP-900 with standard MIDI cables.

When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI.

When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the CVP- 900, as shown in the diagram below. Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI.

When the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI, the TO HOST terminal is disabled.

When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, refer to the owners manual for the particular software you are using.

If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of PC-1 is 31,250 bps.)

NEC

PC-9821 AS

NEC MultiSync

MINI DIN 8-pin

D-sub 9-pin

MINI DIN 8-pin

D-sub 25-pin

D-sub 9-pin

PC-1 PC-2 MIDIMac

Clavinova

* When using a D-SUB 25P MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a D- SUB9P plug adaptor on the computer side of the cable.

MINI DIN 8-pin

MINI DIN 8-pin

PC-1 PC-2 MIDIMac

Clavinova

NEC

PC-9821 AS

NEC MultiSync

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

PC-1 PC-2 MIDIMac

Clavinova

MIDI IN RS422

MIDI OUT

MINI DIN 8-pin

PC-1 PC-2 MIDIMac

Clavinova

155CVP-900

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

156

Using the USB terminal on your computer with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96/ UX16, etc.) Connect the UX256/UX96/UX16 and the computer with a USB cable. Install the included UX256/UX96/UX16 driver to the computer, and connect the UX256/UX96/UX16 to the CVP-900 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch on the CVP-900 to MIDI. For details, refer to the owners manual of the UX256/UX96/UX16.

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant owners manuals.

Whats MIDI? Lets consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers.

Now lets examine what happens when we play back a recording. When you playback a music CD (for example, a solo piano recording), youre hearing the actual sound (vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.

In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the pianists performance are captured in the recording as audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the actual piano performance. The piano itself is not necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.

Clavinova

Personal computer

MIDI INUSB cable

MIDI OUT

USB interface

NEC

PC-9821 AS

NEC MultiSync

PC-1 PC-2 MIDIMac

IN OUT

MIDI

Internal ampInternal amp Tone generator (Electric circuit)

Playing the keyboard

RL

Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers.

Acoustic guitar note production

Digital instrument note production

Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument (audio data)

Recording Playback

FD

Tone generator

Sequencer

FD

Recording and playing back the performance of a digital instrument (MIDI data)

Controller (keyboard, etc.)

Recording Playback

In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument.

CVP-900

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

The controller and tone generator in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example. Here, the players performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano, special recording equipment is needed. However, since the Clavinova features a built-in sequencer that lets you record performance data, this recording equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument the Clavinova allows you to both record and play back the data.

However, we also need a sound source to produce the audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The tone generator of the Clavinova lls this function. The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds including that of a piano. Looked at in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument, such as guitar or violin.

Finally, well take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds. For example, lets say you play a C quarter note using the grand piano sound on the CVP-900 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as with what voice, with which key, about how strong, when was it pressed and when was it released. Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note.

Example Keyboard Data

Panel operations on the CVP-900, such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs also consist of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The CVP-900 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data.The CVP-900 can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specied for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages.

Channel Messages The CVP-900 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO HOST terminal). This is usually expressed as it can play 16 instruments at the same time. Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels.

Tone generator

Sequencer

Keyboard performance (MIDI data)

Even though it is a single musical instrument, the Clavinova can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a control- ler, a tone generator, and a sequencer.

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Message Name CVP-900 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specic note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.

Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.

MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data: The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI

songs to oppy disk. The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of

changing voices and transforming the data.

The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI data.

157CVP-900

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

158

MIDI channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specic channel.Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specic MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instruments MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.

For example, several tracks (channels) can be transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as shown below).

Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the Clavinova to an external sequencer

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 146). The Clavinova also allows you to determine how the received data is played back. (page 147).

System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the CVP-900 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the separate Data List.

What You Can Do With MIDI The following MIDI settings can be made on the Clavinova: MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various

applications) (page 145) Transmit (page 146) Receive (page 147) Local Control (page 145) Clock (page 146)

Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the CVP-900 Auto Accompaniment features on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the CVP-900 (playback).

When you want to use the Clavinova as an XG- compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to SONG in MIDI Receive (page 147).

Play and control the Clavinova from a separate keyboard

1

Weather Report

News

2

2

News

MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2

MIDI cable

The Clavinovas keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI (page 145).

MIDI cable or serial cable

Clavinova track (channnel)

MAIN

LAYER

LEFT

STYLE instrument

STYLE instrument

STYLE instrument

STYLE instrument

STYLE instrument

STYLE instrument

STYLE instrument

STYLE instrument

External sequencer

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Message Name CVP-900 Operation/Panel Setting

System Exclusive Message

Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation

Clavinova

Personal cumputer, QY series etc.

MIDI receive

MIDI transmit

NEC

PC-9821 AS

NEC MultiSync

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

Clavinova MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI receive

CVP-900

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CVP-900, and whether or not the CVP-900 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below.

Disk format Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to rst congure the oppy disk to the system of the device being used.This operation is called formatting.

There are two types of oppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems.

CVP-900 can record and playback with both types of oppy disks.

When formatted by the CVP-900, a 2DD disk stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The gures 720 KB and 1.44MB indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.)

Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk.

Sequence Format The system which records song data is called sequence format. Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The CVP-900 is compatible with the following formats.

SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0.

The CVP-900 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1.

Song data recorded on the CVP-900 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0.

Song data loaded to the CVP-900 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original format.

ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamahas MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments.This is a common format used with various Yamaha software.

XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) format with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future.

The CVP-900 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF le containing lyric data is played.

Style File The Style File Format SFF is Yamahas original style le format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

159CVP-900

Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices

160

Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specic numbers, called program numbers. The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the voice allocation format.

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback.

The CVP-900 is compatible with the following formats.

GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.

Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level1, as is most commercially available software.

XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

Song data recorded on the CVP-900 using voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible.

DOC This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamahas MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments.This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specications of the devices and particular data recording methods.

CVP-900

Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts

in the correct orientation. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below.

Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use

of incorrect screws can damage the stand. Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing the assembly

of each unit. To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

1 Remove all parts from the box. Conrm that all parts shown in the illustration are included.

Main unit

How to position the main unit

Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the oor. Place the unit on the cloth with the key cover closed and the keyboard side on the bottom and lean the unit against the wall so that the unit will not fall or slip. Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the instrument and the wall from scratches.

2 Attach two front legs and a rear leg. Refer to the diagram below to verify the orientation of the legs.

Install and tighten four screws on each leg, starting with one of the front legs.

3 Install the pedal box.

1 Remove the plastic tie that afxes the pedal cord to the upper portion of the pedal box.

2 Align the cord with the groove on the unit, and attach the pedal box using four screws.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

Lean the unit against the wall as shown below.

Legs Pedal box

AC power cord 625 mm xing screws 16

Cord holder

CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your ngers.

Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom.

CAUTION Do not place the main unit with the rear side facing down.

CAUTION Do not lay the main unit upside down on the oor.

CAUTION Do not position the main unit so that its bottom is in contact with oor.

Rear leg

Front leg Front leg

Plastic tie

161CVP-900

Keyboard Stand Assembly

162

CVP-900

3 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal connector. Insert the plug so the arrow side faces front (toward the keyboard). If the plug will not go in easily, do not force it. Double-check the orientation of the plug, then try again.

4 Attach the cord holder on the unit as shown in the illustration below, then use the cord holder to afx the pedal cord.

4 Raising the unit to the standing position. Use the front legs as support to raise the unit.

5 Connect the power cord.

6 Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in rm contact with the oor surface.

After completing the assembly, please check the following.

4

3

CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your ngers. When you raise the unit, do not hold the key cover.

Left of the rear leg on the bottom of the main unit, when viewed from front

Are there any parts left over? Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors. Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable

xtures? Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? Tighten all screws.

Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? Turn the adjuster so that it is set rmly against

the oor. Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely

into the sockets? Check the connection.

If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.

When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.

Top portion

Key cover

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

The Clavinova does not turn on; there is no power.

Make sure that the Clavinova has been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into the AC socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet (page 17).

A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off.

This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument.

Noise is heard from the Clavinovas speakers. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova.

The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature; try adjusting the contrast (page 149).

The keyboard volume is low compared to that of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback.

The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 62).

The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback is low compared to that of the keyboard.

The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display (page 121).

The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard.

The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 62).

Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 62, 77). Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. (This happens

when the speaker setting is set to HEADPHONE SW; page 149.) Unplug the headphones.

Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 149). Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 145).

The damper, sostenuto and soft functions do not work for the relevant pedals.

Each pedal has been assigned to a different function. Make sure that each pedal is properly assigned to SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, and SOFT (page 139).

The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed.

The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely insert the pedal plug into the proper jack (page 161 - 162).

Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the Clavinova. When this happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. See page 166 for information on the maximum polyphony.

Accompaniment style or Song playback does not start.

MIDI Clock may be set to EXTERNAL. Make sure this is set to INTERNAL (page 146).

Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 62); to playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 75).

New Song (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an appropriate song in the SONG display (page 75).

The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 77).

Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button.

The accompaniment style does not start, even when Synchro Start is in standby condition and a key is pressed.

You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment) range of the keyboard.

The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment.

You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (page 64).

You may be playing the keys according to a different ngering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode (page 63).

163CVP-900

Troubleshooting

164

Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard.

This is normal if the ngering mode is set to Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard. If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different ngering mode (page 63).

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than Equal, changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure Equal is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 135).

Some channels do not properly play back when playing back song data.

Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 77).

If you experience distorted or out-of-tune sound from the Vocal Harmony feature, your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds (other than your voice) the Auto Accompaniment sound from the Clavinova, for example. In particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony feature.

The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as possible is picked up by your vocal microphone: Sing as closely to the microphone as possible. Use a directional microphone. Turn down the MASTER VOLUME or volume for each part. Separate the microphone from the instrument's speakers as much as

possible. Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING

display (page 130). Increase the microphone input level (TH.) in the Compressor function from

the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 130).

Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature.

Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Harmony mode. See page 131.

The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard ngering modes. Select an appropriate ngering mode (page 63).

The microphone input signal and Vocal Harmony sound cannot be recorded.

This is normal; recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible.

MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables are connected properly.

Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI (page 155). The MIDI terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings.

When a voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed.

Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 143).

There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes played on the keyboard.

Some voices have a looping sound. Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher

pitches, depending upon the voice.

This is normal and is a result of the Clavinovas sampling system.

Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers.

This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift.

Even though a Registration Memory setting containing a User voice is selected, the Open/ Save display shows a Preset voice.

This is normal; even with the Preset voice shown, the actual sounding voice is the selected User voice. When a User voice is registered to the User drive or oppy disk, the actual registered is: 1) the source Preset voice, and 2) the parameter settings as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a User voice, the PF-1000 selects the Preset voice (on which the User voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings to it so that your original User voice is sounded.

Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1 megabyte of data to a oppy disk.

The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 122).

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

CVP-900

Troubleshooting

The sound is distorted or noisy. The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate.

This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects (page 123).

Some lter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 91) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary.

Is the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display (Mixing Console page 125) ?

A strange anging or doubling sound occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different each time the keys are played.

Both the Main and Layer parts are set to ON, and both parts are set to play the same voice. Set the Layer part to OFF (page 57) or change the voice for each part (page 55).

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

165CVP-900

166

Specications

: available

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Display 640 480 dots backlit graphic LCD

Keyboard 88 keys (A-1 - C7)

Voice Polyphony (max) 256

Voice Selection 390 voices + 480 XG voices + 26 Drum Kits

Regular Voice 343

Sweet Voice 10

Cool Voice 6

Live Voice 17

Natural Voice 37

Organ Flutes 10 (9 Footages)

Sound creator

Effects

Effect Blocks

Reverb 2

Chorus 2

DSP 7

Brilliance 1

Microphone 1

Effect Types

REVERB1 29 Preset+3 User

REVERB2 5

CHORUS1 25 Preset+3 User

CHORUS2 3

DSP1 164 Preset+3 User

DSP2 12

DSP3,4,5,6 164 Preset +10 User

DSP7 88 Preset +10 User

Brilliance 5

Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User

Part EQ 27 Parts

Vocal Harmony 59 Preset +10 User

Accompaniment Style

Number of Accompaniment Styles 231

Number of Session Styles 28

Number of Pianist Styles 36

Number of Piano Combo Styles 17

Fingering Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Style Creator

OTS (One Touch Setting) 4/Accompaniment Style

OTS link

Music Finder Approximately 2500 records

Edit

Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ

Preset Songs

Guide Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Vocal CueTIME

Guide Lamp 88 Red

Lyrics

Score

Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing

Record Channels 16

CVP-900

Specifications

* Specications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specications at any time without prior notice. Since specications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Memory Device

Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD)

Flash Memory (internal) 4MB

Flash Availability Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc.

Tempo Tempo Range 5 - 500

Tap Tempo

Metronome

Sound Bell on/off, Human Voices (5 languages)

Registration Memory

Buttons 8

Regist Sequence

Freeze

Others Demo Function, Voice, Style

Language 6 languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian)

Help

Direct Access

Piano setting button (including Piano Lock)

Master Volume

Fade In/Out

Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master

Tuning

Tuning Curve Flat/Stretch (Natural Piano Voice only)

Scale Equal Temperament, Pure Major/Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean-Tone, Werckmeister/Kirnberger, Arabic 1/2

Touch Response 5 level

Jacks/Connectors PHONES 2, MIDI (THRU, OUT, IN), TO HOST, HOST SELECT SW, AUX PEDAL, AUX IN (L/L+R), AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), AUX OUT (L/L+R)

MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./ LINE IN),VIDEO OUT

Pedals Number of Pedals 3

Pedal Functions VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO, PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, VIBROTOR ON/OFF, SONG START/STOP, STYLE START/STOP, etc.

Ampliers/ Speakers

Ampliers 60 W 2

Speakers (16 cm + 5 cm + 3 cm) 2

Dimensions [W D H] (Lid up)

1430 1148 933 mm [56-5/16" 45-3/16" 36-3/4"]

(1430 1148 1270 mm) [56-5/16" 45-3/16" 50"]

Weight 115 Kg (253 lbs., 8 oz)

167CVP-900

168

Index

Numerics 1 - 16 ................................................................................. 107 [1] - [8] buttons ........................................... 18, 3946 3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER) .................................... 130

A [A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 18, 41 Accessories ............................................................................ 6 Accompaniment Guide ........................................................ 79 Accompaniment style parts................................................... 96 [ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 61 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 120 Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 123 Adjusting the Sound to Match the Performance Environment ...125 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 51 Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings

and Microphone Effects ................................................. 130 Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 62 Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels ... 77 Adjusting values ................................................................... 47 AI ......................................................................................... 63 AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 63 AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 63 Any Key ............................................................................... 79 Append ................................................................................ 72 Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 58 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style.................... 68 Arabic ................................................................................ 136 Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 65 Assembling an Accompaniment Style ................................. 114 ATTACK ............................................................................... 91 AUTO .................................................................................. 20 Auto Revoice...................................................................... 121 [AUTO FILLIN] button.................................................... 18, 67 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings

with the Sections............................................................... 69 AUX IN [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................ 19, 153 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 153 AUX OUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks........................................ 19, 153 [AUX PEDAL] jack........................................................ 19, 154

B [BACK] button.......................................................... 18, 41, 47 BACK GROUND.................................................................. 84 [BALANCE] button ......................................................... 18, 62 Bar Clear ............................................................................ 117 Bar Copy ............................................................................ 117 Basic Operations Organizing Your Data .......................... 39 Bass...................................................................................... 96 BEAT .............................................................................. 71, 72 [BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 65 BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 91

C Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music ................................ 70 Cent ................................................................................... 135 Change the Rhythmic Feel.................................................. 115 Changing Pitch-related Settings .......................................... 122 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings .......... 143 Changing the Icon ................................................................ 47 Changing the Tone of the Voice ......................................... 122

Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose....................141 Channel ..................................................62, 77, 104, 117, 137 Channel Messages ..............................................................157 Channel Muting ....................................................................62 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................18, 62, 77 Channel Transpose .............................................................106 CHD...................................................................................108 Chord ...................................................................................96 Chord Detect ......................................................................147 Chord Events.......................................................................108 Chord Fingering ............................................................63, 139 Chord Tutor ........................................................................139 Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode....................64 Chorus ................................................................................126 Clock ..................................................................................146 COLOR NOTE......................................................................83 COMMON ...........................................................................90 Compatible Song Types ........................................................74 COMPRESSOR....................................................................131 CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................148 CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................149 Connect the power cord .......................................................17 Connecting Audio & Video Devices....................................153 Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................154 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar ................................152 Connecting to a Computer ..................................................154 Controller ...........................................................................139 Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) ............................46 Cool! ....................................................................................56 COPY ...................................................................................44 Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................150 Copying Files/Folders............................................................44 Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................150 Creating Accompaniment Styles..........................................110 Current Memory ...................................................................40 Customizing the Event List Filter.....................................109 CUT......................................................................................43

D Damper pedal.................................................................19, 59 Data Compatibility..............................................................159 [DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................18, 47 Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........146 DECAY .................................................................................91 DELETE .................................................................................44 Delete.................................................................................105 DELETE RECORD..................................................................72 Deleting Files/Folders............................................................44 [DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 53 DEPTH..................................................................................91 Detailed Settings for Notation ...............................................82 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button........................14, 18, 94, 110 [DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................18, 48 Direct Access Chart ..............................................................49 Disk ....................................................................................150 Disk format .........................................................................159 Disk Orchestra Collection.....................................................19 Displaying Music Notation ...................................................81 Displaying the Lyrics.............................................................84 Displaying Upper Level pages...............................................45 DOC...................................................................................160 Drum....................................................................................56

CVP-900

Index

[DSP] button .......................................................... 18, 58, 126 Dynamics ........................................................................... 116

E ECHO .......................................................................... 59, 143 EDIT................................................................................... 113 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style ............................... 115 Editing a Recorded Song..................................................... 104 Editing Channel-related Parameters .................................... 104 Editing Chord Events .......................................................... 108 Editing Note Events ............................................................ 107 Editing Records .................................................................... 72 Editing System Events ......................................................... 108 Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 117 Editing Voices ...................................................................... 88 [EFFECT] button ........................................................... 18, 128 Effect Block ........................................................................ 124 Effect Structure ................................................................... 126 EFFECT/EQ ........................................................................... 92 Effects................................................................................. 123 EG........................................................................................ 91 Embellish and enhance your melodies

with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 30 END Mark .......................................................................... 102 ENDING .............................................................................. 67 [ENDING / rit.] button.............................................. 18, 31, 66 [ENTER] button .............................................................. 18, 47 Entering Characters............................................................... 46 Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ......................... 101 Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) ............................ 46 Entering numbers ................................................................. 46 Entering special character marks

(umlaut, accent, Japanese and ) ......................... 46 Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 151 EQ...................................................................................... 125 Equal Temperament............................................................ 136 ESEQ .................................................................................. 159 Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 157 [EXIT] button .................................................................. 18, 41 exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 41 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.................................... 18, 78

F Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time ........... 148 [FADE IN / OUT] button................................................. 18, 66 FAVORITE............................................................................ 72 [FF] button ..................................................................... 18, 77 File ....................................................................................... 40 File/Folder-related Operations .............................................. 42 Files/folders in a floppy disk ................................................. 43 Fill........................................................................................ 67 Filter..................................................................... 91, 109, 122 FINGERED ........................................................................... 63 FINGERED ON BASS............................................................ 63 First Key On ....................................................................... 103 FLOPPY DISK drive .............................................................. 40 Floppy disk drive.............................................................. 19, 6 Follow Lights ........................................................................ 79 Foot Controller ............................................................. 59, 154 FOOTAGE (Organ Flutes) ..................................................... 93 Footswitch.................................................................... 59, 154 Formatting a Disk ............................................................... 150 [FREEZE] button...................................................... 19, 87, 142 FULL KEYBOARD................................................................. 63 [FUNCTION] button .................................................... 18, 133

G Gate Time.............................................................................99 GENRE............................................................................71, 73 GENRE NAME ......................................................................73 GM System Level 1 .......................................................19, 160 Groove ...............................................................................115 Groove parameters .............................................................115 [GUIDE] button ........................................................14, 18, 79

H Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........6 Harmonic Content ................................................................91 HARMONY ............................................................59, 92, 143 Harmony Assignments ........................................................144 Harmony Types ..................................................................144 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ..........................................18, 59 Headphones .................................................................17, 152 Help messages can be displayed in any one

of the following languages.................................................50 [HELP] button .................................................................18, 50 High Key.............................................................................119 [HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 154 Hz ......................................................................................135

I ICON SELECT .......................................................................47 [INPUT VOLUME] knob ...............................................19, 152 Inputting and Editing Lyrics.................................................109 Instant Selection of Displays .................................................48 INTRO..................................................................................67 [INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 65

K Karao-Key .............................................................................79 Key cover..............................................................................16 KEY SIGNATURE ..................................................................82 Keyboard guide lamps ....................................................19, 79 Keyboard Percussion.............................................................56 Keyboard Touch .................................................................141 Keyboard/Panel...................................................................141 KEYWORD .....................................................................71, 72 Kirnberger...........................................................................136

L Layer.....................................................................................57 Layering Two Different Voices ..............................................57 LCD......................................................................................15 Left .......................................................................................58 LEFT CH. ..............................................................................82 [LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................18, 59 Left pedal........................................................................19, 59 Lid ........................................................................................16 Live! .....................................................................................56 Live!Drums ...........................................................................56 Local Control ......................................................................145 Loop recording ...................................................................110 Lyrics ............................................................................84, 109 LYRICS BACKGROUND PICTURE........................................84

M MAIN A/B/C/D......................................................................65 MAIN [A] button.............................................................18, 65 MAIN [B] button .............................................................18, 65 MAIN [C] button.............................................................18, 65

169CVP-900

Index

170

MAIN [D] button............................................................ 18, 65 MAIN PICTURE.................................................................. 151 Maintaining Panel Settings ................................................. 142 Maintenance .......................................................................... 8 Making Global and Other Important Settings...................... 133 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) ....145 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,

Parameter Lock, and Tap ................................................ 148 Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System,

and Voice Number Indication......................................... 149 Making Settings for the Pedals ............................................ 139 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ..................... 139 Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone... 130 Making Style File Format Settings ....................................... 118 Master Tune ....................................................................... 135 Mastering Your Favorite Songs.............................................. 38 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................ 18, 17 Mean-Tone......................................................................... 136 Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 99 [MEMORY] button.......................................................... 19, 85 Message Switch.................................................................. 146 Messages ................................................................................ 8 Metronome ........................................................................ 148 METRONOME [START / STOP] button........................... 18, 51 MIC. ................................................................................... 128 [MIC. LINE] switch ....................................................... 19, 152 [MIC. LINE IN] jack...................................................... 19, 152 Microphone ....................................................................... 128 MICROPHONE SETTING ................................................... 130 [MIC. SETTING] button ................................................ 18, 128 MIDI .................................................................................. 145 MIDI [THRU] [OUT] [IN] terminals.............................. 19, 154 MIDI channels.................................................................... 158 MIDI IN.............................................................................. 154 MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 154 MIDI Receive Parts ............................................................. 147 MIDI SETUP ....................................................................... 151 MIDI terminals ................................................................... 154 MIDI THRU........................................................................ 154 Mix .................................................................................... 105 [MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 120 [MONO] button ............................................................. 18, 59 Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 43 MULTI FINGER .................................................................... 63 Multi Recording ................................................................... 96 [MUSIC FINDER] button .................................... 15, 19, 33, 70 Music Finder Record Edit ..................................................... 72 Music Finder Search............................................................. 71 Music Rest............................................................................ 16 Muting Specific Parts ............................................................ 78

N NAME .................................................................................. 42 Naming Files/Folders ............................................................ 42 Natural Voices ..................................................................... 89 Natural!................................................................................ 56 NEW (FOLDER) .................................................................... 45 NEW RECORD..................................................................... 72 [NEXT] button .......................................................... 18, 41, 47 NOISE GATE ...................................................................... 130 Normal............................................................................... 103 Note Events ........................................................................ 107 Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)................. 154 Note Limit .......................................................................... 119 NOTE NAME........................................................................ 83 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ........................................... 118 NTT (Note Transposition Table).......................................... 119

O OCTAVE.............................................................................122 One Touch Setting ................................................................32 ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons...................19, 68, 69 One-touch Piano Play...........................................................56 [ON / OFF] button (POWER)...........................................18, 17 Open/Save displays...............................................................39 Organ Flutes! ........................................................................56 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder...........................45 Other Parameters in the Basic Display ................................113 Other Playback-related Operations .......................................77 Other Settings .....................................................................148 [OTS LINK] button ..........................................................18, 69 Outputting the sound of an external device

through the built-in speakers of the Clavinova .................153 OVERALL SETTING ............................................................130 Overdub recording .............................................................110 Owner ................................................................................151

P Pad .......................................................................................96 Parameter ...........................................................................118 Parameter Lock ...................................................................149 PASTE.............................................................................43, 44 Pedal ..................................................................................139 Pedal (Center) .......................................................................59 Pedal (Left)............................................................................59 Pedal (Right) .........................................................................59 Pedal-controllable Functions...............................................140 [PHONES] jacks............................................................19, 152 Phrase...................................................................................96 Phrase Mark..................................................................77, 137 [PIANO] button ........................................................15, 19, 56 PIANO (SOUND CREATOR).................................................90 Piano Lock function ..............................................................56 PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................122 Pitch settings for each scale ................................................136 Playback of Songs .................................................................21 Playing a style.................................................................28, 60 Playing a Styles Rhythm Channels only................................62 Playing Along with the Clavinova .........................................36 Playing and Practicing with the Songs...................................36 Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................................77 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands.........27 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically

when changing accompaniment sections ..........................67 Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously.................................57 Playing Styles........................................................................28 Playing the Demos..........................................................20, 53 Playing the Internal Songs .....................................................75 Playing the sounds of the Clavinova through an external audio

system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder ... 153 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously......................................26 Playing Voices ......................................................................25 PORTAMENTO TIME..........................................................122 Practice Functions.................................................................79 Practicing Music with the Guide Functions ...........................80 PRESET drive.........................................................................40 Preset MIDI Templates ........................................................145 Punch In/Out ......................................................................103 Pure Major..........................................................................136 Pure Minor..........................................................................136 Pythagorean........................................................................136

CVP-900

Index

Q QUANTIZE .......................................................................... 82 Quantize .................................................................... 104, 117 Quantize Size..................................................................... 104 Quick Recording .................................................................. 95 Quick Start ......................................................................... 137

R Realtime Recording ............................................................ 112 Realtime Recording Characteristics..................................... 110 [REC] button................................................................... 18, 94 Rec Mode........................................................................... 103 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup................................. 87 Recalling the Registered Settings........................................... 87 Receive .............................................................................. 147 Receive Transpose.............................................................. 146 Receiving MIDI Data .......................................................... 147 record .................................................................................. 70 Recording............................................................................. 37 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment .... 101 Recording Individual Notes .................................................. 98 Recording Melodies ........................................................... 100 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs................ 94 Registering Panel Setups ....................................................... 85 Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ............ 69 REGISTRATION BANK......................................................... 86 REGISTRATION EDIT display............................................... 86 REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] [8] buttons ................... 19, 85 Registration Sequence ........................................................ 142 Regular Voices ..................................................................... 89 RELEASE............................................................................... 91 Remove Event .................................................................... 117 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range .................................... 78 [REPEAT] button............................................................. 18, 78 Replace ................................................................................ 72 Resonance............................................................................ 91 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the CVP-900 ....151 [REVERB] button............................................................. 18, 58 Reverb................................................................................ 126 [REW] button ................................................................. 18, 77 Rhythm ................................................................................ 96 RIGHT CH. .......................................................................... 82 Root ................................................................................... 147 RTR (Retrigger Rule) ........................................................... 119

S SAVE .................................................................................... 45 Save ............................................................................... 39, 45 Saving Files .......................................................................... 45 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.............................. 86 Scale .................................................................................. 136 Scale Tune ......................................................................... 135 Score.................................................................................... 81 Searching the Ideal Setups .................................................... 71 Searching the Music Finder Records ..................................... 34 Section button indications [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN],

[ENDING] buttons ............................................................ 65 sections ................................................................................ 30 Select the Recording Options: Starting,

Stopping, Punching In/Out .............................................. 103 Selecting a Scale ................................................................ 135 Selecting a Voice.................................................................. 55 Selecting Files and Folders ................................................... 41 Selecting Intro and Ending Types.......................................... 67 Selecting items ..................................................................... 47 Selecting the Freeze Settings................................................. 87

Sequence Format ................................................................159 sequencer ...........................................................................157 Set Up.................................................................................106 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters................138 Setting Chord Channels.......................................................147 Setting Harmony and Echo..................................................143 Setting Root Note Channels ................................................147 Setting Separate Voices for the Left

and Right Sections of the Keyboard ...................................58 Setting Song-related Parameters ..........................................137 Setting the Fingering Method ..............................................139 Setting the Level Balance and Voice ...................................121 Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects ...........132 Setting the MIDI Parameters................................................145 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ....142 Setting the volume ................................................................17 SFX .......................................................................................56 Sheet Music Braces ...............................................................16 Showing the Clavinova Display on a TV .....................144, 153 Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ... 76 SINGLE FINGER....................................................................63 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ....................................................159 Song ...............................................................................14, 74 SONG AUTO REVOICE......................................................121 Song Book ......................................................................22, 74 Song Creator .........................................................................94 Song Playback ..........................................................21, 74, 75 Song Recording.....................................................................94 Song Settings.......................................................................137 SONG [START / STOP] button ........................................18, 75 Sostenuto pedal ..............................................................19, 59 SOUND (SOUND CREATOR)...............................................90 SOUND CREATOR Parameters (Natural/Regular Voices) ......89 [SOUND CREATOR] button ...........................................18, 88 Source Root/Chord..............................................................118 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory

Presets .............................................................................142 SPEED...................................................................................91 Split Point ...........................................................................138 Step Record ..........................................................................98 Step Record (Chord)............................................................101 Step Record (Note)..............................................................100 Step Recording....................................................................113 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys................66 Style................................................................................14, 60 Style Creator .......................................................................110 Style File .......................................................................19, 159 Style File Format .................................................................111 Style Sections........................................................................30 Style Setting ........................................................................138 STYLE [START / STOP] button.........................................18, 61 sustain ..................................................................................91 Sweet!...................................................................................56 [SYNC.START] button .....................................................18, 61 [SYNC.STOP] button.......................................................18, 66 SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) ..................................................108 System ................................................................................145 System Events .....................................................................108 System Messages.................................................................158 System Reset .......................................................................151 SYSTEM SETUP...................................................................151

T [TALK] button ...............................................................18, 128 TALK SETTING ...................................................................132 Tap Count...........................................................................149 [TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................18, 52

171CVP-900

Index

172

TEMPO [E] [E] buttons ............................................ 18, 51 TEMPO FROM ..................................................................... 71 Tempo Indications MAIN Display.................................... 52 TEMPO TO .......................................................................... 71 [TO HOST] terminal....................................... 15, 19, 154, 155 [TOP] button .................................................................. 18, 77 [TRACK 1 (R)] button...................................................... 18, 78 [TRACK 2 (L)] button ...................................................... 18, 78 Transmit ............................................................................. 146 Transmit Clock ................................................................... 146 Transmitting MIDI Data ...................................................... 146 TRANSPOSE [E] [E] buttons................................... 18, 141 Transpose Assign................................................................ 141 Tune................................................................................... 122 TUNING ............................................................................ 122 Tuning the Overall Pitch .................................................... 135

U UP........................................................................................ 45 USER drive ........................................................................... 40 USER EFFECT ............................................................. 124, 151 Using the USB terminal on your computer

with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256, etc.)......................... 156 Using Your Clavinova with Other Devices ......................... 152 Utility ................................................................................. 148

V [VARIATION] button...................................................... 18, 58 Velocity........................................................................ 99, 116 Velocity Change................................................................. 117 [VH TYPE SELECT] button ............................................ 18, 128 VIBRATO ............................................................................. 91 [VIDEO OUT] jack............................................... 19, 144, 153 Vocal CueTIME .................................................................... 79 [VOCAL HARMONY] button........................................ 18, 128 VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL......................................... 131 Vocal Harmony Type ......................................................... 128 Voice Allocation Format..................................................... 160 VOICE buttons ......................................................... 15, 19, 55 Voice Characteristics ............................................................ 56 Voice Effects......................................................................... 58 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button ......................... 18, 57 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button ............................ 18, 57 Voice Set ............................................................................ 143 VOL/ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ................................................ 93 Volume/Voice .................................................................... 121

W Werckmeister ..................................................................... 136 What You Can Do With MIDI ............................................ 158 Whats MIDI? ..................................................................... 156

X XF ................................................................................ 19, 159 XG ............................................................................... 19, 160

CVP-900

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ- ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Verication: Yamaha products are

manufactured specically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verication and (if applicable) instruc- tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specically recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect- ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom- mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25 cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specically

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signicantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualied service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic- ing should be referred to qualied service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

amplier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro- ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory

mounting xtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional xtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires) This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

(polarity) This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music

Ltd. Ceci ne sapplique quaux produits distribus par Yamaha Canada

Musique Lte.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc- tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require- ments. Modications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces- sories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail- ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori- zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com- ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class B digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula- tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line lter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac- tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo- ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa- ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden- tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter- minal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR VITER LES CHOCS LEC- TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQUAU FOND.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de dtails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous gurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgefhrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslndern erhltlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha ms cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouas 2636, So Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA Yamaha de Panam S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panam S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanizacin Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panam, Panam Tel: 507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Zweigniederlassung Zrich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zrich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA Yamaha Europa GmbH. Zweigniederlassung Wien Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Professionnelle BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Valle Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Msica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Gteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofce Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY Norsk lial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Nringspark 1 N-1345 sters, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030

Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacic Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0661

MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacic Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317

AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacic Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273

[CL] 24

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation 2002 Yamaha Corporation V954900 ???AP???.?-0?A0 Printed in Indonesia

Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ </

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Clavinova Yamaha works, you can view and download the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-900 Piano Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Yamaha Clavinova as well as other Yamaha manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Yamaha Clavinova. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-900 Piano Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Yamaha Clavinova CVP-900 Piano Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Yamaha Clavinova CVP-900 Piano Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Yamaha Clavinova CVP-900 Piano Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-900 Piano Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.